2007 chevrolet impala owner manual m...a notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle....

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................ 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 16Safety Belts ............................................ 20Child Restraints ...................................... 43Airbag System ........................................ 69Restraint System Check ......................... 86

Features and Controls ................................. 89Keys ....................................................... 91Doors and Locks .................................. 100Windows ............................................... 105Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 107Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 111Mirrors .................................................. 126OnStar® System ................................... 128Universal Home Remote System .......... 132Storage Areas ...................................... 142Sunroof ................................................ 144

Instrument Panel ........................................ 145Instrument Panel Overview ................... 148Climate Controls ................................... 166Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .... 172Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 188Audio System(s) ................................... 213

Driving Your Vehicle .................................. 247Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 248Towing ................................................. 284

Service and Appearance Care ................... 295Service ................................................. 297Fuel ...................................................... 299Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 306Headlamp Aiming ................................. 346Bulb Replacement ................................ 346Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 352

2007 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

1

Tires ..................................................... 354Appearance Care .................................. 390Vehicle Identification ............................. 399Electrical System .................................. 400Capacities and Specifications ................ 405

Maintenance Schedule ............................... 407Maintenance Schedule .......................... 408

Customer Assistance Information ............. 427Customer Assistance and Information ..... 428Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 446

Index ........................................................... 449

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem,the IMPALA Emblem, and the name IMPALA areregistered trademarks of General MotorsCorporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appearsin this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15863014 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Passenger Seat ................................ 9Power Seats ............................................... 10Manual Lumbar ........................................... 11Heated Seats .............................................. 11Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 12Head Restraints .......................................... 15Center Seat ................................................ 16

Rear Seats .................................................... 16Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 16

Safety Belts .................................................. 20Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 20Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 25Driver Position ............................................. 25Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 34Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 35Right Front Passenger Position ................... 35

Center Front Passenger Position ................. 36Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 37Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 39Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 42Safety Belt Extender ................................... 42

Child Restraints ............................................ 43Older Children ............................................. 43Infants and Young Children ......................... 46Child Restraint Systems .............................. 50Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 54Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 55Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 62Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ....................... 64Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 65

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 69Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 72When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 75What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 77How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 77What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 78Passenger Sensing System ......................... 79

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 84Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 85Restraint System Check ............................... 86

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 86Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 87

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Manual Passenger SeatYour vehicle may have a manual passenger seat.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat with yourbody to be sure the seat is locked in place.

9

Power Seats If the vehicle has power seats, the controls usedto operate them are located on the outboardside of the seats. To adjust the seat, do any of thefollowing:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the control upor down.

Your driver’s seat may have power recliningseatbacks. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”under Reclining Seatbacks on page 12 for moreinformation.

Driver’s Seat with Manual Lumbar, Power SeatControl, and Power Recline shown

10

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has manual lumbar, the lever islocated on the outboard side of the driver’sseat near the front of the seat cushion. Lift up onthe lever repeatedly to increase lumbar support.Push down on the lever repeatedly to decreaselumbar support.

Heated Seats

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the buttons thatcontrol temperaturefor the driver’s andfront passenger’s seatsare located on theclimate control panel.See Climate ControlSystem on page 166.

Press the button once to warm the seat to a hightemperature. Both lights below the heated seatsymbol will come on. Press the button a secondtime to reduce the seat to a lower temperature.The bottom light will be lit. Press the button athird time to turn the heated seat off.

The heated seat feature will need to be turnedon each time the ignition is turned off and backon again.

Driver’s Seat with Manual Lumbar and8-way Power Controls shown

11

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

The vehicle may have a manual recline on thefront passenger’s seat. There may be manualrecline on the driver’s seat.

Passenger’s Seat with Manual Recline andPower Seat Control shown

12

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sureit is locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sureit is locked.

Power Reclining Seatback

The driver’s seat may have a power recliningseatback. The control used to operate it is locatedon the outboard side of the seat cushion rear ofthe horizontal power seat control.

• Press the control rearward to recline theseatback.

• Press the control forward to raise theseatback.

Driver’s Seat with Manual Lumbar, Power SeatControl, and Power Recline shown

13

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

14

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it. To lowerthe head restraint,press the button,located on the top ofthe seatback, and pushthe restraint down.

15

Center Seat

Your vehicle may have a front center seat. Thereare cupholders on the underside of the seatcushion. To use them, flip the seat cushionforward. This seat can also be used as a storagearea by lowering the seatback. See CenterConsole Storage Area on page 143. The seatbackdoubles as an armrest for the driver or frontpassenger when the center seat is unoccupied.

For information on safety belts for this position, seeCenter Front Passenger Position on page 36.

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear Seat

Flip and Fold FeatureIf your vehicle has this feature, you can flip thebottom seat cushion(s) forward and fold theseatback(s) down for an extended flat cargo area.

To use this feature, do the following:

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

16

1. Disconnect the rearcenter safety beltlatch from themini buckle, if yourvehicle has this,by using an objectsuch as a car key.

Insert the key into the slot in the mini buckleand press the release button.

2. Flip the bottom seat cushion forward bypulling up on the tab located in the centerof the seat cushion where the seatback meetsthe seat cushion. There is a tab on bothrear seats.Make sure the front seats are not reclined.If they are, the seat cushion will not flip forwardcompletely.

17

3. Lower theseatback(s) bypulling forward onthe tab locatedon the outboard sideof the seatback(s).

Make sure the front seats are not reclined.If they are, the rear seatbacks will notfold down all the way.

To return the seats to the normal position, do thefollowing:

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

1. Raise the seatback up and make sure it latches.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed,not properly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure thatthe safety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

18

2. Ensure that the safety belts are properlystowed over the seatback in all three positions.

3. Reconnect therear center safetybelt latch plateto the mini buckle,if your vehiclehas this.

Make sure the safety belt label is facing thesame direction as the release button ofthe mini buckle. Make sure the belt is nottwisted. Push and pull on the latch plate tobe sure it is secure.

4. Flip the bottom seat cushion back into place.Push firmly on the seat cushion to make sureit is secure.

When the seat is not in use, the seatback shouldbe placed in upright, locked position, and theseat cushion should be in the down position.

Under Seat StorageYour vehicle has under seat storage.

To get to the storage area, lift up on the tablocated in the center of the bottom seat cushionwhere the seat cushion meets the seatback.See Rear Storage Area on page 143 for moreinformation.

19

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 175and Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Lighton page 175.

20

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

21

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

22

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

23

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down.And your chance of being conscious duringand after an accident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why shouldI have to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

24

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speedsof less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 43 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 46. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is howto wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

25

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 42.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 34.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

26

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

27

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

28


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

29


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

30


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your beltgoes over an armrest like this. The beltwould be much too high. In a crash, youcan slide under the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied at the abdomen,not at the pelvic bones, and that couldcause serious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.

31


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

32


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have the fullwidth of the belt to spread impact forces.If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it canwork properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

33

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltadjuster to the height that is right for you.Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down,squeeze thebuttons (A) on thesides of the heightadjuster and movethe height adjuster tothe desired position.

You can move the adjuster up just by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.After you move the adjuster to where you wantit, try to move it down without squeezing thebuttons to make sure it has locked into position.

34

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 25.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

35

Center Front Passenger Position

Lap BeltIf your vehicle has a front bench seat, someonecan sit in the center position.

When you sit in the center front seating position,you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate andpull it along the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end asshown until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way asthe lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isnot long enough, see Safety Belt Extenderon page 42.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

36

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.And they can strike others in the vehicle whoare wearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.

37

If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 42.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

38

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

39

There is one guide for each outboard passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the guide out from the pocket on theedge of the seatback.

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt, and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots of theguide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

40

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly wornmay not provide the protection needed ina crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restrainingforces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 37. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Slide the guide into thestorage pocket on the edge of the seatback.

41

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 87.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

42

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

43

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 39. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

44

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

45

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

46

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

47

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchasedby the vehicle’s owner, are available infour basic types. Selection of a particularrestraint should take into considerationnot only the child’s weight, height, and agebut also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in whichit will be used.

48

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle.If it is, the restraint will have a label saying thatit meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crash

CAUTION: (Continued)


forces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants always should besecured in appropriate infant restraints.

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

49

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

50

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

51

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safetybelt or LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap belt portion ofa lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system.See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55 for more information.A child can be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

52

When securing an add-on child restraint, referto the instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing thechild within the child restraint. One system,the three-point harness, has straps that comedown over each of the infant’s shouldersand buckle together at the crotch. The five-pointharness system has two shoulder straps, twohip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may takethe place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield hasshoulder straps that are attached to a flatpad which rests low against the child’s body.

A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that areattached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swingsup or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

53

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates.



This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be veryclose to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

54

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killed bythe right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

55

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodatea child restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

56

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors,each seating positionwith lower anchors hastwo labels, near thecrease between theseatback and theseat cushion.

Rear Seat

57

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on thetrim cover.

The top tether anchors are located under the trimcovers on the rear seatback filler panel behindeach head restraint. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of the vehicle asthe seating position where the child restraint willbe placed. Do not secure a child restraint in the right front

passenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restrainton page 54 for additional information.

58

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold onlyone child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single anchorcould cause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

59

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

60

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Push on the depression at the rear of

the trim cover lid and swing the lid opento expose the top tether anchor.

2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest and you areusing a single tether,route the tether over thehead restraint.

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest and you areusing a dual tether,route the tether aroundthe head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

61

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

62

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

63

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 55.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat Position

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killed bythe right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Do not secure a child restraint in the center frontseat position.

64

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 54.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 79 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 177 formore information on this including importantsafety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

65

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualPassenger Seat on page 9 or Power Seatson page 10.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child restraintin this position if a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be anchored.See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55 if your child restrainthas a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 79. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See ManualPassenger Seat on page 9 or Power Seatson page 10.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to RUN or START.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 177.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

66

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

67

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.

If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on theinstrument panel will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to RUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint.

68

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driverand a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted sideimpact airbags. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsare available for the driver and the passengerseated directly behind the driver and for the rightfront passenger and the passenger seateddirectly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG will appear onthe airbag covering on the ceiling near the sidewindows.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

69

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deployin moderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed to



inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Roof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover or in rearcrashes. Everyone in your vehicle shouldwear a safety belt properly — whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.

70

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 43 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 46.

71

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 176 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

72

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the driver and the person seated directlybehind the driver, it is in the ceiling above theside windows.

73

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger and the personseated directly behind that passenger, it is inthe ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupantand an airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. And, if your vehiclehas roof-mounted side impact airbags,never secure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie downthrough any door or window opening.If you do, the path of an inflating sideimpact airbag will be blocked. The pathof an inflating airbag must be kept clear.

74

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderateto severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. Butthey are designed to inflate only if the impactexceeds a predetermined deployment threshold.Deployment thresholds take into account a varietyof desired deployment and non-deploymentevents and are used to predict how severe a crashis likely to be in time for the airbags to inflateand help restrain the occupants. Whetheryour frontal airbags will or should deploy is notbased on how fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit, the directionof the impact, and how quickly your vehicleslows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors which help the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impactand a more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a levelless than full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs. If the front ofyour vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesnot move or deform, the threshold level forthe reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level fora full deployment is about 18 to 22 mph(29 to 35.4 km/h). The threshold level can vary,however, with specific vehicle design, so that itcan be somewhat above or below this range.

75

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have side impactairbags. See Airbag System on page 69.Side impact airbags are intended to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes. A side impactairbag will inflate if the crash severity is above thesystem’s designed threshold level. The thresholdlevel can vary with specific vehicle design.Side impact airbags are not intended to inflate infrontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers, orrear impacts. Both side impact airbags will deploywhen either side is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown in frontal or near-frontal impacts. Forside impact airbags, inflation is determined by thelocation and severity of the impact.

76

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules inside thesteering wheel and in the instrument panel in frontof the right front passenger. For vehicles withroof-mounted side impact airbags, there are alsoairbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided bysafety belts. Airbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.But the frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

77

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,so quickly that some people may not even realizethe airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impactairbags may still be at least partially inflatedminutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Somecomponents of the airbag module — the steeringwheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger’s airbag, or thegarnish trim and ceiling of your vehicle nearthe side windows for vehicles with roof–mountedside impact airbags — may be hot for a short time.The parts of the airbag that come into contactwith you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There may be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andturn the hazard warning flashers when the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors again, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for those features.

78

In many crashes severe enough to inflate anairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will needsome new parts for the airbag system. If youdo not get them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need toreplace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 440.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can mean thatyour airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theinstrument panel will be visible when you turn yourignition key to RUN or START. The words ONand OFF or the symbol for on and off, willbe visible during the system check.

If you use remote start to start your vehicle froma distance, if your vehicle has this feature,you may not see the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either the word ONor the word OFF, or the symbol for on or thesymbol for off will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 177.

United States Canada

79

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat and safety belt. The sensors are designedto detect the presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the passenger’s frontalairbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

There is a label on your sun visor that says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”This is because the risk to the rear-facing child isso great if the airbag deploys. Never put a rearfacing child restraint in the right front passengerseat unless the airbag is off.

Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


80


If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.• The system determines that an infant is

present in a rear-facing infant seat.• The system determines that a small child is

present in a forward-facing child restraint.• The system determines that a small child is

present in a booster seat.• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off

of the seat for a period of time.• The right front passenger seat is occupied by

a smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system

When the passenger’s frontal airbag has beenturned off by the passenger sensing system, theoff indicator on the instrument panel will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and theon indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove thechild restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 65.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle if one is available and check withyour dealer.

81

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seat cushion,with the person’s legs comfortably extended.

Restart the vehicle and have the person remainin this position for about two minutes. Thiswill allow the system to detect that person andthen enable the passenger’s airbag.

82

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something maybe wrong with the airbag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger’s seatmay not have the protection of the frontalairbag. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 176 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers,can affect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not usingseat covers or other aftermarket equipment ifyour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 85 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

83

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchasea service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 447.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

84

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 428.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceilingand pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbagmodules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 428.

85

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 393for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering forthe driver’s or the right front passenger’sairbag, or the side impact airbag covering(if equipped) on the ceiling near the sidewindows, the airbag may not work properly.You may have to replace the airbag modulein the steering wheel, both the airbag moduleand the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s airbag, or side impact airbagmodule and ceiling covering for roof-mountedside impact airbags (if equipped.) Do notopen or break the airbag coverings.

86

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal or side airbags inflate you will alsoneed to replace the driver and front passenger’ssafety belt retractor assembly. Be sure to doso. Then the new retractor assembly will be thereto help protect you in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 176.

87

✍ NOTES

88

Keys .............................................................. 91Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 92Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .................................... 93Doors and Locks ........................................ 100

Door Locks ................................................ 100Power Door Locks ..................................... 101Automatic Door Lock ................................. 102Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 102Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 102Lockout Protection ..................................... 103Trunk ........................................................ 103

Windows ...................................................... 105Power Windows ........................................ 106Sun Visors ................................................ 107

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 107Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 107PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 108PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 109

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 111New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 111Ignition Positions ....................................... 112Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 113Starting the Engine .................................... 114Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 115Active Fuel Management™

(3.9L V6 and 5.3L V8 Engines) .............. 116Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 117Parking Brake ........................................... 120Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 121Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 123Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 123Engine Exhaust ......................................... 124Running the Engine While Parked ............. 125

Mirrors ......................................................... 126Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 126Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 126Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® .......................................... 126Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 127Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 127

Section 2 Features and Controls

89

OnStar® System .......................................... 128Universal Home Remote System ................ 132

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED) ....................... 132

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 132

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With three round LED) .......... 133

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With one triangular LED) ....... 139

Storage Areas ............................................. 142Glove Box ................................................. 142Cupholder(s) .............................................. 143Sunglasses Storage Compartment ............. 143Center Console Storage Area .................... 143Rear Storage Area .................................... 143Rear Seat Armrest .................................... 143Convenience Net ....................................... 144

Sunroof ....................................................... 144

Section 2 Features and Controls

90

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

91

One key is used forthe ignition and thedriver’s door.

If you need a new key, contact your dealer forassistance. In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 434 for more information.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemThe remote keyless entry system operateson a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

• This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

• This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

• This device may not cause interference.

• This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

92

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any remote keyless entry system.If the transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitterto work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement orresynchronization is necessary. See “BatteryReplacement” and “Resynchronization”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 93.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked,and the trunk can be unlatched from about3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m) away with theremote keyless entry transmitter.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature youcan also start your vehicle with the remote keylessentry transmitter. Your remote keyless entrytransmitter, with the remote start button, providesan increased range of 195 feet (60 m) away.However, the range may be less while the vehicleis running. As a result, you may need to becloser to your vehicle to turn it off than you wereto turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 92.

93

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the remote keyless entry system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, it may be started from outsidethe vehicle using the remote keyless entrytransmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start” followingfor more detailed information.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps will flash once toindicate locking has occurred. If enabled throughthe DIC, the horn will chirp when the lock button ispressed again within five seconds of the previouspress of the lock button. See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 206 for additionalinformation. Pressing the lock button may arm thecontent theft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 107.

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock thedriver’s door. If the button is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.The interior lamps will come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps willflash once to indicate unlocking has occurred.See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 206.Pressing the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter will disarm the contenttheft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 107.

Remote Keyless Entrywith Remote Start

Remote Keyless Entrywithout Remote Start

94

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and holdthis button for about one second to releasethe trunk lid. The transaxle must be in PARK (P)for this feature to operate.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to locate your vehicle. The turnsignal lamps will flash and the horn will soundthree times. Press and hold this button for morethan two seconds to activate the panic alarm. Theturn signal lamps will flash and the horn willsound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm willturn off when the ignition is turned to RUN orthe alarm button is pressed again. The ignitionmust be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking yourvehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through your GMdealer. Remember to bring any additionaltransmitters so they can also be re-coded tomatch the new transmitter. Once your dealer hascoded the new transmitter, the lost transmitterwill not unlock your vehicle. The vehicle can havea maximum of eight transmitters matched to it.See Remote Key under DIC Operation andDisplays on page 189.

95

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remotekeyless entry transmitter should last aboutfour years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwill not work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it is probably time to changethe battery.

The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage in the vehicle’s DIC will display if theremote keyless entry transmitter battery islow. See “REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 197for additional information.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the remote keyless entrytransmitter do the following:

1. Use a flat object with a thin edge into thenotch, located below the trunk releasebutton, and separate the bottom half from thetop half of the transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

96

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing down.Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalenttype. Make sure the cover is on tightly,so water will not get in.

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside of the vehicle.

If your vehicle has an outside temperature display,during remote start this feature allows theclimate control system to default to a heatingmode during colder outside temperatures and acooling mode during warmer outside temperatures.If your vehicle does not have an outsidetemperature display, during remote start theclimate control system will turn on at the settingthe vehicle was set to when the vehicle waslast turned off.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, requiring a personusing remote start to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check local regulations forany requirements on remote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

Your remote keyless entry transmitter, withthe remote start button, provides an increasedrange of operation. However, the range maybe less while the vehicle is running. As a result,you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn itoff, than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 92 foradditional information.

/ (Remote Start): Press and release the lockbutton and then press and hold this button to usethe remote start feature.

97

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button until theturn signal lights flash or if the vehicle’slights are not visible, press and hold theremote start button for at least four seconds.The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing theremote start button again after the vehicle hasstarted will turn off the ignition.

3. When the vehicle starts, the parking lampswill turn on and remain on while the vehicleis running.

4. If it is your first remote start since last driving,repeat these steps while the engine is stillrunning for a 10 minute time extension.

When you enter the vehicle during a remote start,and the engine is still running, turn the key tothe RUN position to drive the vehicle.

If the vehicle is left running it will automaticallyshut off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of thefollowing:

• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter atthe vehicle and press the remote startbutton until the parking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazards warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

The remote vehicle start feature provides twoseparate starts, each with 10 minutes of enginerunning, or it provides one start with 10 minutesof engine running that may be extended with10 more minutes. If you press and releasethe transmitter lock button and then press andhold the remote start button, on the remotekeyless entry transmitter, again before the first10 minutes of engine running time has expired,10 minutes are added to the remaining minutes.For example, if the lock button and then theremote start buttons are pressed again afterfive minutes of the engine run time, 10 minutesare added and you now have 15 minutes ofengine running. The added ten minutes areconsidered a second remote vehicle start.

98

Once two remote starts or a single start with atime extension have been provided, the vehiclemust be started normally with the ignition keyto get more remote vehicle starts.

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate ifthe key is in the ignition, the hood is not closedor if there is an emission control systemmalfunction.

Also, the engine will turn off during a remotevehicle start if the coolant temperature gets toohigh or if the oil pressure gets low.

Vehicles equipped with the remote vehicle startfeature are shipped from the factory with theremote vehicle start system enabled. The systemmay be enabled or disabled through the DIC.See “REMOTE START” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 206 for additionalinformation.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote startready feature. This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer’s remote vehicle startfeature.

If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature,your remote keyless entry transmitter will haveextended range that will allow you to lock or unlockyour vehicle from about 195 feet (60 m) away.

See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

99

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out ofa moving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, use your key in the driver’s dooror use the remote keyless entry transmitter. Fromthe inside, use the manual or power door locks.

100

To unlock the driver’s side door from the outsidewith the key, insert the key and turn itcounterclockwise. To lock the driver’s side doorfrom the outside with your key, insert the key andturn it clockwise.

To lock the door fromthe inside, push themanual lock knob down.To unlock the door,pull the knob up.

Power Door Locks

A power door lockswitch is located onboth front doors next tothe door handle.

Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors, orpress the bottom of the switch to lock all doors.

If your vehicle has the optional contenttheft-deterrent system and it is armed, the powerdoor lock switches will be disabled. You mustuse your remote keyless entry transmitter or yourkey to unlock the doors when the system isarmed. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 107.

101

Automatic Door LockThe doors will automatically lock when the shiftlever is moved out of PARK (P). The automaticdoor locking feature cannot be disabled.

Programmable Automatic DoorUnlockYour vehicle is programmed so that when the shiftlever is moved into PARK (P) all doors willunlock.

With the vehicle stopped and the engine running,door unlocking can be programmed throughprompts displayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). These prompts allow the driver tochoose various unlock settings. For programminginformation, see DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 206.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks. Theseprevent passengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door. Youmust open the reardoors to access them.The label depictinglock and unlockpositions is located nearthe lock.

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

Security Lock Labelshown

102

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keylessentry transmitter, if the vehicle has one, thepower door lock switch, or by lifting therear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature helps prevent you from locking thedoors while your key is in the ignition. Alwaysremember to take your key with you when exitingyour vehicle.

If the lock switch is pressed on the door that isopen and the key is in the ignition, all of the doorswill lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.A chime will sound continuously until all doors areclosed.

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with thetrunk lid open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle.You cannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle.See Climate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 124.

103

Trunk ReleaseTo open the trunk from the outside, press theopen trunk button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter, if equipped.

Remote Trunk ReleaseYou can also open the trunk from inside thevehicle.

G (Remote Trunk Release): Press the buttonwith the open trunk symbol on it. The button islocated next to the exterior lamps control onthe left side of the instrument panel. The shift levermust be in PARK (P) for the remote trunkrelease button to work.

If your vehicle ever loses power, you can open thetrunk by lowering the rear seat and pulling theemergency trunk release handle located inside thetrunk. See Split Folding Rear Seat on page 16and “Emergency Trunk Release Handle” following.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handlelocated on the latch inside the trunk. This handlewill glow following exposure to light. Pull the releasehandle to open the trunk from the inside.

104

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

105

Power Windows

The switches on the driver’s door armrest areused to control each of the windows. The powerwindow switches work while the ignition is in RUN,ACCESSORY, or while Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 113. Each passengerdoor has its own window switch.

To lower the window, press and hold the front ofthe switch to the first position until the window is atthe desired level. To raise the window, pull upand hold the front of the switch.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window switch has an express-downfeature labeled AUTO. This allows you to lowerthe window completely without holding the switch.Press the front of the switch to the secondposition and release.

To stop the window while it is lowering, briefly pullup on the switch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The driver’s windowswitches also include a lockout switch. Press theright side of the switch to prevent the rearpassengers from using their window switches. Thedriver can still control all the windows and thefront passenger can control their own window withthe lockout on. Press the left side of the switchto return to normal window operation. A visible redbar on the right side of the switch indicates thatthe lockout is off.

106

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down the sun visors.They can be detached from the center retainer andslid along the rod to cover different areas of thefront window and turned to cover the sidewindows.

Visor Vanity MirrorSwing down the sun visors and lift the cover toexpose the vanity mirror. Do not drive withthe cover lifted due to possible glare impedingother drivers behind or to the side of the vehicle.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have the optional contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

To activate the theft-deterrent system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the power door lock switchor the remote keyless entry transmitter. If youare using the remote keyless entry transmitter,the door does not need to be open.

3. Close all doors.

Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone triesto enter the vehicle without using the remotekeyless entry transmitter or a key or turnsthe ignition on with an incorrect key. The horn willsound and the turn signal lamps will flash forapproximately two minutes.

When the alarm is armed, the trunk may beopened with the remote keyless entry transmitter.The power door lock switches are disabledand the doors remain locked. You must use yourremote keyless entry transmitter or your key tounlock the doors when the system is armed.

107

Arming with the Power Lock SwitchThe alarm system will arm when you use eitherpower lock switch to lock the doors while any dooror the trunk is open and the key is removedfrom the ignition.

Arming with the Remote Keyless EntryTransmitterThe alarm system will arm when you use yourremote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors,if the key is not in the ignition.

Disarming with the Remote KeylessEntry TransmitterThe alarm system will disarm when you use yourremote keyless entry transmitter to unlock thedoors.

The first time a remote unlock command isreceived, three flashes will be seen and three hornchirps heard to indicate an alarm condition hasoccurred since last arming.

Disarming with Your KeyThe alarm system will disarm when you use yourkey to unlock the doors or insert your key inignition and turn it from the OFF position.

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

108


1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.


PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoder inyour vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system. This means you do nothave to do anything special to arm or disarm thesystem. It works when you transition the keyto RUN, ACCESSORY or START from the OFFposition.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone using a trial-and-errormethod to start the vehicle will be discouragedbecause of the high number of electrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and the security lighton the instrument panel cluster comes onwhen trying to start the vehicle, the key may havea damaged transponder. Turn the ignition offand try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check thefuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 400. If the engine still does not start with theother key, your vehicle needs service. If yourvehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. Seeyour dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+to have a new key made. In an emergency,contact Roadside Assistance.

109

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder tolearn the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to nine additional keys maybe programmed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost ordo not operate, you must see your dealer ora locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cutexactly as the ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key do thefollowing:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stampedon it.

2. Insert the original, already programmed, keyin the ignition and start the engine. If theengine will not start, see your dealerfor service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turnit to the RUN position within five seconds ofremoving the original key.

5. The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are driving and the security light comes onand stays on, you may be able to restart yourengine. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,may not be working properly and must be servicedby your dealer.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

110

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops with new liningscan mean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 286 for thetrailer towing capabilities of your vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

111

Ignition PositionsWith the ignition key in the ignition, the key can beturned to four different positions:

Notice: Using a tool to force the key fromthe ignition switch could cause damageor break the key. Use the correct key and turnthe key only with your hand. Make sure thekey is in all the way. If none of this works,then your vehicle needs service.

A (OFF): This is the only position in which theignition key can be inserted or removed. Thisposition locks the ignition and transaxle. It is atheft-deterrent feature.

B (ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio andwindshield wipers operate while the engine isoff. To use ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.

C (RUN): This position is where the key returnsto after the vehicle is started. This position displayssome of the warning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACCESSORY or RUN position with theengine off. You may not be able to start yourvehicle if the battery is allowed to drain foran extended period of time.

D (START): This position starts the engine.

A warning chime will sound and the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will display DRIVERDOOR OPEN when the driver’s door is opened ifthe ignition is in OFF, ACCESSORY and thekey is in the ignition. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 197 for more information.

112

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP),which will allow your vehicle’s radio to workwhen the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY.Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF theradio will continue to work 10 minutes or untilthe driver’s door is opened. Also, the powerwindows will continue to work for up to 10 minutesor until any door is opened.

113

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position -- this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shift intoPARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transaxle gentlyfor the first 2 minutes to allow the oil to warmup and lubricate all moving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system also preventscranking if the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stopped by turning theignition switch to the ACCESSORY or OFFposition.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

114

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. Ifthe vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transaxle gently until theoil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have this feature. In very coldweather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolantheater can help. You will get easier starting andbetter fuel economy during engine warm-up.Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required.

115

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is attached to the undersideof the diagonal brace, which is located abovethe engine air cleaner/filter assembly.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-voltAC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact your dealer in the areawhere you will be parking your vehicle. The dealercan give you the best advice for that particular area.

Active Fuel Management™(3.9L V6 and 5.3L V8 Engines)Your vehicle’s engine may be equipped withActive Fuel Management™. This system allowsthe engine to operate on either all or half ofits cylinders, depending on your driving conditions.When less power is required, such as cruisingat a constant vehicle speed, the system willoperate in the half cylinder mode, allowing yourvehicle to achieve better fuel economy. Whengreater power demands are required, suchas accelerating from a stop, passing, or mergingonto a freeway, the system will maintainfull-cylinder operation.

116

Automatic Transaxle OperationYour automatic transaxle has a shift lever on thesteering column or on the console betweenthe seats.

There is a display, located on the instrument panelcluster that will indicate the gear the vehicle is in.

Maximum engine speed is limited on automatictransaxle vehicles while you are in PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) to protect driveline componentsfrom improper operation.

There are several different positions for the shiftlever.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when the engine isstarted because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 286.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system. Youmust fully apply your regular brakes first andthen press the shift lever button before you canshift from PARK (P) while the ignition is in RUN. Ifyou cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shift lever allthe way into PARK (P) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then press the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into another gear. SeeShifting Out of Park (P) on page 123.

117

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 278.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could move



very rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. Ifyou need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), pushthe accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator pedal all the way down.You will shift down to the next gear and havemore power.

118

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 262.

Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice thatit is moving slowly or not shifting gears asyou increase speed may damage the transaxle.Have your vehicle serviced right away. Youcan drive in SECOND (2) when you are drivingless than 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D)for higher speeds until then.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving. However, it reduces vehicle speedmore than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.You might choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D)when driving on hilly, winding roads, whentowing a trailer, so there is less shifting betweengears and when going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than THIRD (3) without using yourbrakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It canhelp control your speed as you go down steepmountain roads. You would also then want to useyour brakes off and on.

Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph(90 km/h) may damage the transaxle. Also,shifting into SECOND (2) at speeds above65 mph (105 km/h) can cause damage. Drive inTHIRD (3) or DRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).

FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without usingyour brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is inFIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, thetransaxle will not shift into first gear until thevehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle. Ifyou are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

119

Parking Brake

The parking brake islocated to the left of thebrake pedal, near thedriver’s door.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown with your right foot. Push down the parkingbrake pedal with your left foot.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown with your right foot and push the parkingbrake pedal with your left foot. When you lift yourleft foot, the parking brake pedal will follow itto the released position.

A warning chime will sound and a brake warninglight located on the instrument panel clusterwill come on, if the parking brake is set, the ignitionis on and the vehicle speed is greater than5 mph (8 km/h).

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 286.

120

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 121. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 286.

Steering Column Shift Lever1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot

and set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pullingthe shift lever toward you and moving it up asfar as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Console Shift Lever1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot

and set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingin the button on the shift lever and pushingthe lever all the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

121

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intothe PARK (P) position, hold the regular brakepedal down. Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from PARK (P) without first pulling

it toward you or if you have the console shift lever,without first pushing the button. If you can, itmeans that the shift lever was not fully locked intoPARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too much force on theparking pawl in the transaxle. You may findit difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock,set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)properly before you leave the driver’s seat. Tofind out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 121.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, so you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).

122

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system. You must fully apply yourregular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition is in RUN. See AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 117.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever by pushing it all the way intoPARK (P) while keeping the brake pedal pusheddown. Release the shift lever button if youhave a console shift. Then move the shift lever outof PARK (P), being sure to press the shift leverbutton if you have a console shift.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but stillcannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal down until theend of Step 4.

3. Shift to NEUTRAL.

4. Start the engine and shift to the drive gearyou want.

5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

123

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when

driving over high points on the roador over road debris.



• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

124

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 124.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 272.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 121.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 286.

125

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorIf the vehicle has this mirror, it has a lever located atthe bottom of the mirror between the two lamps.The lever is used to change the mirror from the dayto the night position. To reduce glare fromheadlamps behind you while driving at night, pullthe lever toward you. To return the mirror to the dayposition, return the lever to its original position.

There are two map lamps located on the bottomof the mirror. Press the button next to each lamp toturn it on and off.

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

If the vehicle has this mirror, it has a lever locatedat the bottom of the mirror between the twolamps. The lever is used to change the mirrorfrom the day to the night position. To reduce glarefrom headlamps behind you while driving atnight, pull the lever toward you. To return themirror to the day position, return the leverto its original position.


There are also OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror face. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribe toOnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 128 formore information about the services OnStar®

provides.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar®

The vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with the OnStar® System.

Press the button located below the mirror, on thefar left, for up to three seconds to turn theautomatic dimming feature off and on.


There are also OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribe to

126

OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 128 formore information about the service OnStar®

provides.

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrorsare located on thedriver’s door armrest.

Use the selector switch located below the four-waycontrol panel to choose either the left or rightoutside mirror. Then press any of the four arrowslocated on the control pad to move each mirrorin the desired direction.

Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of yourvehicle and the area beside and behind yourvehicle.

Heated Outside MirrorsIf your vehicle has this feature, the surface of theoutside mirrors will heat when the rear windowdefogger is activated. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Climate Control System onpage 166 for more information.

Outside Convex MirrorYour passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so you can see morefrom the driver’s seat.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

127

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Terms and

Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1–888–4–ONSTAR (1–888–466–7827)or TTY 1–877–248–2080, or press the OnStar®

button to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours aday, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®

Plan is included for one year from the date ofpurchase. You can extend this plan beyond thefirst year, or upgrade to the Directions &Connections® Plan. For more information, pressthe OnStar® button to speak with an advisor. SomeOnStar® services (such as Remote Door Unlockor Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may not beavailable until you register with OnStar®.

128

Available Services with Safe &Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification(AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with 30complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak withan OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

129

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutesto access location-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 242 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

130

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe blue OnStar® button to confirm that yourOnStar® equipment is active.

131

Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTE05A.




The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTE05A.


Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

132




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2SAHL3.




The Canadian Registration ID number is2791021849A.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With three round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light EmittingDiode (LED) above the Universal Home RemoteSystem buttons, follow the instructions below. Ifthere is one triangular LED above the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with one triangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up to threeremote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

133

Do not use the this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, forfuture programming. You only need the originalremote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

If you do not know if your garage door opener is afixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif there is a panel of switches. If not, yourgarage door opener is a rolling code device.

134

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

Follow these steps to program up to threechannels:

1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.

Example of Switch Settings

135

4. The indicator light will blink slowly.In order from left to right, and within two andone-half minutes, enter each switch settinginto the Universal Home Remote System.Push one button for each switch as follows:

• Left button = “on” switch position.

• Right button = “off” switch position.

• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–8, choosing adifferent function button in Step 7 than what youused for the garage door opener.

136

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up tothree channels:

1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4depending on your garage control unit. If youcannot locate the “learn” button, refer tothe owners guide for your garage door opener.

137

3. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, abovethe selected button, should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to20 seconds.

4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–6, choosing adifferent function button in Step 4 than what youused for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for approximately 20 seconds,until the indicator lights, located directlyabove the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbutton will be erased.

138

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With one triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) above the UniversalHome Remote buttons, follow the instructionsbelow. If your vehicle has three round LED abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With three round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.If you have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 tocomplete the programming of your Universal HomeRemote Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later inthis section or, for assistance, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 432.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installedin your hand-held transmitter for quicker andmore accurate transmission of the radio-frequencysignal.

139

Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up to threechannels:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constant light,continue with Steps 6 through 8 following tocomplete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage door opener.

140

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release. Repeatthe press/hold/release sequence a secondtime, and depending on the brand of thegarage door opener, or other rolling codedevice, repeat this sequence a third time tocomplete the programming.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” You donot want to repeat Step 1, as this will eraseall previous programming from the Universal HomeRemote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

141

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they canbe reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step 2under “Programming Universal Home Remote”shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 432.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever.

142

Cupholder(s)Your vehicle may have cupholders built into thefront center console, front portion of the frontcenter seat and rear armrest. To access the frontcupholders, on the five-passenger model, pullout the divider in front of the front center consoleto separate the opening into two cupholders.To access the front cupholders, on thesix-passenger model, fold the front portion of thefront center seat forward.

Sunglasses Storage CompartmentYour vehicle may have a sunglass storagecompartment located above the rearview mirror.To open, push on cover.

Do not operate the vehicle with the sunglassesstorage compartment cover open, it could obstructyour view.

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle may have a front center consolestorage area. To open the front center consolestorage area, pull up on the latch located inthe front of the console lid. Inside is a removabletray and an accessory power outlet.

Rear Storage AreaIf your vehicle has the split folding rear seat, therewill be two storage areas underneath. To accessthese storage areas, pull the tab(s) located by theseatbelt buckle on the passenger side and thecenter of the rear seat on the driver side. See SplitFolding Rear Seat on page 16 for moreinformation.

Rear Seat ArmrestYour vehicle may have a rear seat armrest.To access, pull the tab on the armrest forward.

143

Convenience NetThe vehicle may have a convenience net locatedon the back wall of the trunk.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Storethose in the trunk as far forward as possible.

Unhook the net so that it will lie flat when notin use.

Sunroof

If your vehicle isequipped with asunroof, the sunroofswitches are located onthe overhead console.

The sunroof can only be operated when theignition is in ACCESSORY, RUN, or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 113.

Q (Vent/Express-Open): To vent the sunroofwhen it is closed, press this switch once.When using the vent, the sunshade should be fullyopened. The sunshade can be opened or closedmanually by sliding it rearward or forward.

From the vent position, press this switch again toactivate the express-open feature. Press theclose switch to stop movement of the sunroof. Thesunshade will automatically open when usingexpress-open.

A deflector will automatically pop up when thesunroof is opened. The deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

R (Close): To close the sunroof, press and holdthis switch until the sunroof motor stops, orrelease the switch when the desired position hasbeen reached.

144

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 148Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 150Other Warning Devices ............................. 150Horn .......................................................... 150Tilt Wheel .................................................. 150Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 151Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 152Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 153Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 153Windshield Wipers ..................................... 153Windshield Washer .................................... 154Cruise Control ........................................... 155Exterior Lamps .......................................... 158Delayed Headlamps .................................. 160Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/

Automatic Headlamp System .................. 160Fog Lamps ................................................ 161Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 161Courtesy Lamps ........................................ 161Dome Lamp .............................................. 162Entry Lighting ............................................ 162Delayed Entry Lighting .............................. 162Delayed Exit Lighting ................................. 163Parade Dimming ........................................ 163Reading Lamps ......................................... 163

Electric Power Management ...................... 163Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 164Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 165Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 166

Climate Controls ......................................... 166Climate Control System ............................. 166Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 170Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 171

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 172Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 173Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 174Tachometer ............................................... 174Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 175Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 175Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 176Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 177Charging System Light .............................. 179Brake System Warning Light ..................... 179Anti-Lock Brake System

Warning Light ........................................ 180Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 181Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ........................................ 181

Section 3 Instrument Panel

145

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 182Tire Pressure Light .................................... 182Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 183Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 186Security Light ............................................ 187Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 187Cruise Control Light .................................. 187Highbeam On Light ................................... 187Fuel Gage ................................................. 188

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 188DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 189DIC Compass ............................................ 195DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 197DIC Vehicle Customization ........................ 206

Audio System(s) ......................................... 213Setting the Time (Without Date Display) .... 214Setting the Time (With Date Display) ......... 215Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 217Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 223Using an MP3 ........................................... 233XM Radio Messages ................................. 240Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 241Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 242Radio Reception ........................................ 243Care of Your CDs ..................................... 244Care of the CD Player .............................. 244Backglass Antenna .................................... 244XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 245

Section 3 Instrument Panel

146

✍ NOTES

147

Instrument Panel Overview

148

The main components of your instrument panel are listed here:

A. Air Vent. See Outlet Adjustment on page 170.B. Remote Trunk Release Button. See “Remote

Trunk Release” under Trunk on page 103.C. Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 151.D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel

Cluster on page 173.E. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 150.F. Driver Information Center. See Driver

Information Center (DIC) on page 188.G. Passenger Air Bag status Indicator. See

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 177.H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on

page 213.I. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on

page 158.J. Instrument Panel Brightness. See Instrument

Panel Brightness on page 161.K. Traction Control On/Off Button (If Equipped).

See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 256.

L. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel onpage 150.

M. Steering Wheel Cruise Control. See CruiseControl on page 155.

N. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 307.

O. Horn. See Horn on page 150.P. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).

See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 242.

Q. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions onpage 112.

R. Climate Controls. See Climate Control Systemon page 166.

S. Accessory Power Outlets. See AccessoryPower Outlet(s) on page 165.

T. Center Console Shift Lever (If Equipped). See“Console Shift Lever” under Shifting IntoPark (P) on page 121.

U. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 142.

149

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedon top of the steeringcolumn.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key is not in.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. The steering wheel can beraised to the highest level to give your legs moreroom when you enter and exit the vehicle.

The tilt wheel lever is located on the left side ofthe steering column.

150

To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and pull the lever.Then move the wheel to a comfortable positionand release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 152.

• 2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. SeeHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 153.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 153.

151

• N Windshield Wipers. See WindshieldWipers on page 153.

• LQ Windshield Washer. See WindshieldWasher on page 154.

For information on the headlamps, see ExteriorLamps on page 158.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower thelever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold itthere until you complete your lane change. Thelever will return by itself when you release it. If youmomentarily press and release the lever, theturn signal will flash three times.

If the arrow flashes faster than normal as yousignal a turn or a lane change, a signal bulb maybe burned out and other drivers won’t seeyour turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows don’t go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs andthen check the fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 400.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf you leave either one of your turn signals on anddrive more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a chime willsound to alert you.

152

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal/multifunction leveraway from you.

When the high beamsare on, a light on theinstrument panel clusteralso will be on if theignition is on.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.

Flash-to-PassWith the turn signal lever in the low-beam position,pull the lever toward you momentarily to switch tohigh-beams (to signal that you are going to pass).

If you have the headlamps on, they will return tolow-beams when you release the lever.

This feature operates even when the headlampsare off.

Windshield WipersBe sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper bladesbefore using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, gently loosen or thaw them. Damagedwiper blades may not clear the windshield well,making it harder to see and drive safely. If theblades do become damaged, install new blades orblade inserts. For more information, see WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement on page 352.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Acircuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

You control the windshield wipers by turning theband with the wiper symbol on it.

8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn theband to mist. Hold it there until the wipersstart. Then let go. The wipers will stop after onewipe. If you want more wipe cycles, hold the bandon mist longer.

6 (Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a longor short delay between wiping cycles. This canbe very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the bandto choose the delay time. The closer to the topof the lever, the shorter the delay.

153

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at lowspeed, turn the band away from you to thefirst solid band past the delay settings.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turnthe band further, to the second solid band past thedelay settings.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the bandto off.

Windshield WasherAt the top of the multifunction lever, there is apaddle with the windshield washer symbol on it.Push the paddle to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers run for several sweeps andthen either stop or return to the preset speed.The ignition key must be in ACCESSORY or RUNfor this to work. See Windshield Washer Fluidon page 336.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

When the vehicle is low on washer fluid, theWASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC) for 60 seconds.When the ignition is turned off, this messagedisplays again for three seconds to remind youthat the fluid level is low.

Until the fluid reservoir is refilled, every timethe vehicle is started, the WASHER FLUID LOWADD FLUID message displays in the DIC for60 seconds. Be sure to refill the tank right away.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 197.

154

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.



Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when thetraction control system, if your vehicle has thisfeature, begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 256. Whenroad conditions allow you to safely use it again,the cruise control can be turned back on.

155

The cruise controlbuttons are located onleft side of thesteering wheel.

T (On/Off): Press this button to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicator will be litwhen cruise control is on.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this buttonto make the vehicle accelerate or resume toa previously set speed.

SET–: Press this button to set the speed or makethe vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruisecontrol.

Setting Cruise ControlCruise control will not work if the parking brake isset, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

The cruise control light on the instrument panelcluster will come on after the cruise controlhas been set to the desired speed.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you donot want to. You could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the cruise controlswitch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

1. Press the cruise control on/off button.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press and release the SET– button located onthe steering wheel.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

156

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set the cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This shutsoff the cruise control, but it does not need tobe reset.

Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, press the +RES button on the steeringwheel. The vehicle will go back to your chosenspeed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo increase the cruise speed while using cruisecontrol:

• Press and hold the +RES button on thesteering wheel until you reach your newdesired speed, then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,press the +RES button.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the SET– button on thesteering wheel until you reach the lower speedyou want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, pressthe SET– button on the steering wheelbriefly. Each time this is done, you will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase vehiclespeed. When you take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to the cruise speed youset earlier.

157

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the accelerator pedal tomaintain your speed. When going downhill, youmay have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keepyour speed down. Of course, applying the brakeends the cruise control. Many drivers find this to betoo much trouble and do not use cruise control onsteep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to end cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Press the [ (cancel) button on the steeringwheel.

• Press the T (on/off) button on the steeringwheel.

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memory is erased byturning off the cruise control or the ignition.

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lampscontrol is located on theinstrument panel tothe left of the steeringwheel.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Fog Lamps (if equipped)

158

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn the control to this position toturn off the automatic light control. Briefly turnto this position again to turn automatic light controlon again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to automatically turn on the headlamps atnormal brightness, together with the following:

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Taillamps



2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps together with thefollowing lamps listed below. A warning chime willsound if you open the driver’s door when theignition switch is off and the headlamps are on.

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



- (Fog Lamps, If Equipped): Push the foglamps control in to turn on the fog lamps.

See Fog Lamps on page 161.

159

Delayed HeadlampsThe delayed headlamps feature provides a periodof exterior lighting as you leave the area aroundyour vehicle. The feature is activated whenthe headlamps are on due to the automaticheadlamps control feature described previously inthis section, and when the ignition is turned off.Your headlamps will then remain on until theexterior lamps control is moved to the parkinglamps position or until the pre-selected delayedheadlamp lighting period has ended.

If you turn off the ignition with the headlampsswitch in the parking lamps or headlamps position,the delayed headlamps cycle will not occur.

To disable the delayed headlamps feature orchange the time of delay, see DIC VehicleCustomization on page 206.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in theshort periods after dawn and before sunset. Fullyfunctional daytime running lamps are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panelmakes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system’s automatic headlamp controlwill make the low-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when the following conditionsare met:

• The ignition is in RUN.

• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.

• The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, only the low-beamheadlamps, at a reduced level of brightness, willbe on. The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, andother lamps will not be on. The instrumentpanel and cluster will also not be lit.

160

When it is dark enough outside, your low-beamheadlamps will turn off and the headlamps andparking lamps will turn on. The other lamps thatcome on with the headlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside, the headlampswill go off and the DRL will come on.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

Fog Lamps

- (Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps,the control is located on the exterior lampscontrol. The exterior lamps control is located onthe instrument panel to the left of the steeringcolumn.

Your ignition must be in the RUN position for thefog lamps to come on.

To turn the fog lamps on, press the exterior lampsbutton. A light will come on in the instrumentpanel cluster to let you know that the fog lampsare on. Press the exterior lamps button againto turn the fog lamps off.

When the headlamps are changed to high-beam,the fog lamps also go off.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel Brightness

D (Instrument Panel Brightness): The knobwith this symbol on it is located next to the exteriorlamps control. Press the knob until it pops outand then turn the knob clockwise to brightenor counterclockwise to dim the lights.

Courtesy LampsWhen a door is opened, the courtesy lampsautomatically come on. They make it easy for youto enter and leave your vehicle. You can alsomanually turn these lamps on by turning theinstrument panel brightness control clockwise allthe way.

The reading lamps, located on the rearview mirror,can be turned on or off independent of theautomatic courtesy lamps, when the doors areclosed.

161

Dome LampThe dome lamp will come on when you open adoor. You can also turn this lamp on by turning theinstrument panel brightness control clockwise.

Entry LightingYour vehicle may have courtesy lamps that willcome on and stay on for a set time wheneverUNLOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entrytransmitter, if you have one.

If a door is opened, the lamps will stay on while itis open and then turn off automatically about25 seconds after the door is closed. If UNLOCK ispressed and you do not open a door, the lampswill turn off after about 40 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a feature called theaterdimming. With theater dimming, the lamps do notturn off at the end of the delay time. Instead,they slowly dim after the delay time until they goout. The delay time is canceled if you turn theignition key to ON or press the power doorlock switch. The lamps will dim right away.

When the ignition is on, illuminated entry isinactive, which means the courtesy lamps will notcome on unless a door is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for aperiod of time after all the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayed entry lightingto work. Immediately after all the doors have beenclosed, the delayed entry lighting feature willcontinue to work until one of the following occurs:


• The doors are locked.

• An illumination period of 25 seconds haselapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain on because adoor is open.

162

Delayed Exit LightingThis feature illuminates the interior for a period oftime after the key is removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting towork. When the key is removed, interiorillumination will activate and remain on until one ofthe following occurs:


• The power door locks are activated.

• An illumination period of 20 seconds haselapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain on because adoor is open.

Parade DimmingThe instrument panel has an added feature calledparade mode. This feature prohibits the dimmingof your instrument panel displays during thedaylight while the headlamps are on so that youwill still be able to see the displays.

Reading LampsYour vehicle may have reading lamps that arelocated in the dome lamp. Press the button to turnthem on and off.

Electric Power ManagementThis vehicle has Electric Power Management(EPM), an advanced control system. It estimatesthe battery’s temperature and state of chargeand then adjusts the voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youmay see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

163

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or ServiceBattery Charging System.

If this message is displayed, it is recommendedthat the driver reduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 197.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis vehicle has a feature to help prevent thebattery from being drained, if the interior courtesylamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity lampsor trunk lamp are accidentally left on. If anyof these lamps are left on, they will automaticallyturn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off.The lamps will not come back on again until youdo the following:

• Turn the ignition on, or

• turn the exterior lamps control off, thenon again.

The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if theyare manually turned on before the ignition is off.

164

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Your vehicle has three 12-volt outlets which can beused to plug in electrical equipment such as acellular telephone, a compact disc player, etc.

On vehicles with a center console, one outlet islocated at the rear of the console in the bottom ofthe bin and two outlets are located at the frontof the console bin under the instrument panel. Liftthe cover to access the outlet. Close the coverwhen not using the outlet.

On vehicles without a center console, two arelocated under the climate controls and anotheroutlet for the rear seat passengers is at the rear ofthe center front seat. Remove the rubber coverto access the outlets. When not using theoutlet, make sure the cover is on it.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysunplug electrical equipment when not in useand do not plug in equipment that exceeds themaximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible tothe accessory power outlet and could result inblown vehicle and adapter fuses. If you experiencea problem, see your dealer for additionalinformation on the power accessory plugs.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not use equipment exceeding maximumamperage rating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer before adding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment. Check with your dealerbefore adding electrical equipment, and never useanything that exceeds the maximum amperagerating of 20 amps.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

165

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have an ashtray and a cigarettelighter. The ashtray and cigarette lighter maybe located in the console, if your vehicle has one,otherwise, they may be located in the centerarmrest of the front seat.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignite themand possibly damage your vehicle. Never putflammable items in the ashtray.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

To use the lighter, just push it in all the way andlet go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemThis vehicle may have a dual or single climatecontrol system. With this system you can controlthe heating, cooling, defrost, defog andventilation for your vehicle. If this vehicle hasheated seats, see Heated Seats on page 11.

Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls

166

Manual OperationTurn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel outlets and the other halfto the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor outlets, with some of the air directed to thewindshield and side window outlets. In this mode,the system will automatically select Outside Air.

The right knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost mode. For more information, see“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.

By positioning the right knob between two modes,a combination of those two modes is selected.

The air conditioning compressor will operateunless the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) orbelow.

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. If the airflow seems low when the fanis at the highest setting, the passengercompartment air filter may need to be replaced.For more information, see PassengerCompartment Air Filter on page 171 andScheduled Maintenance on page 410.

Single Zone

167

: (Outside Air): Press this button to turn onoutside air. When this mode is on, outside airwill circulate throughout your vehicle. When thebutton is pressed, an indicator light will come on toshow that it is on.

? (Recirculation): Press this button to turn onthe recirculation mode. When the button ispressed, an indicator light will come on to showthat it is on.

This mode keeps outside air from entering thevehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air andodors from entering your vehicle. Recirculationmay also help heat or cool the air inside yourvehicle more quickly once the temperature insidethe vehicle is equal to or better than the outsidetemperature. The recirculation mode cannotbe used with outside air, floor, defrost, ordefogging modes.

Temperature Control: Turn the thumbwheels upor down to increase or decrease the temperatureon the driver’s side or the passenger side ofthe vehicle for the dual zone system. Turn thecenter knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the temperature for thesingle zone system.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. WhenA/C is pressed, an indicator light will come on tolet you know that the air conditioning is on.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do thefollowing:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select A/C.

3. Select the coolest temperature for both zones.

4. Select the highest fan speeds.

5. When the coolest temperature is selected inthe A/C mode, the system will automaticallygo into the recirculation mode to improvecooling. Press the Outside Air or Recirculationbutton to turn off the automatic recirculation.This feature will stay off until the climatecontrol system is powered on again or thevehicle has been turned off and on again.

168

Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside of your vehicleto become too dry. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air inside of your vehicle hascooled, turn the recirculation mode off.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climate controlsystem is used properly. There are two modes toclear fog or frost from your windshield. Use thedefog mode to clear the windows of fog or moistureand warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode toremove fog or frost from the windshield morequickly.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Turn the right knob clockwise to select the defogor defrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode directs air equally to thewindshield and the floor outlets. When defogis selected, the system turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning compressor unlessthe outside temperature is below 40°F (4°C).

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield with some air to the side windowvents and to the floor vents. When defrost isselected, the system will automatically force outsideair into the vehicle. The air conditioning compressorwill run automatically in this setting, unless theoutside temperature is below 40°F (4°C).

169

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

<(Rear Window Defogger): The rear windowdefogger will turn off automatically after it hasbeen activated for 10 minutes. It can be turned offmanually, by pressing the button again or byturning the ignition to the OFF position. If additionalwindow clearing is required, the rear windowdefogger can be turned on again for additionalwindow clearing. The length of defogger operationwill increase if the vehicle is being driven.If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors,the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirror when the rearwindow defog button is pressed. See OutsidePower Mirrors on page 127.Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and the repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decalor anything similar to the defogger grid.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the thumbwheel located below or to the side ofthe outlet, to change the direction of the air flow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of thesystem.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside yourvehicle more effectively.

• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at thehighest setting, the passenger compartmentair filter, if equipped, may need to replaced.For more information, see PassengerCompartment Air Filter on page 171 andScheduled Maintenance on page 410.

• If fogging reoccurs while in vent or bi-levelmodes with mild temperature throughoutthe vehicle, turn on the air conditionerto reduce windshield fogging.

170

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThis vehicle has a passenger compartmentparticulate air filter. It is located underneath thehood just below the windshield wiper arm onthe passenger’s side of the vehicle, under the airinlet grille.

The filter traps most of the pollen from air enteringthe Climate Control System. Like your engine’sair cleaner/filter, it may need to be changedperiodically to ensure system performance. Forinformation on how often to change the passengercompartment air filter, see Scheduled Maintenanceon page 410.

To change the passenger compartment air filter,use the following steps:

1. Turn off the ignition when the windshieldwipers are in the up position.

2. Raise the vehicle hood.

3. Peel back the hood weatherstrip from thepassenger’s side of the vehicle halfway tocenter.

4. Remove the air inlet grille retainers.5. Lift the air inlet grille and disconnect the

washer hose at the quick-connect.6. Remove the air inlet grille.7. Remove the water deflector plate.8. Remove the old passenger compartment

air filter.

9. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.For best climate control system performance,be sure to re-install the air filter.For the type of filter to use, see NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 421.

171

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to your warning lights and gages couldalso save you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be oris a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know they’reworking. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly – and even dangerous.So please get to know your warning lightsand gages. They’re a big help.

Your vehicle may also have a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) that works along with the warninglights and gages. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 188.

172

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running.You will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel is in your tank and many other things youneed to drive safely and economically.

United States Uplevel shown, Base and Canada similar

173

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour(km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehiclehas been driven in either miles (used in theUnited States) or in kilometers (used in Canada).

Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.If you see ERROR, you’ll know someonehas probably tampered with it and the numbersmay not be accurate.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicleneeds a new odometer installed. If the newone can be set to the mileage total of the oldodometer, then that will be done. But if it can’t,then it will be set at zero and a label must be puton the driver’s door to show the old mileagereading when the new odometer was installed.

Tachometer

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

The tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

174

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, a chimewill be provided for several seconds to remindpeople to buckle their safety belts. The driver safetybelt light will also be provided and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.You should buckle your seat belt.

This chime and light willbe repeated if the driverremains unbuckledand the vehicleis in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime northe light will be provided.

Passenger Safety Belt ReminderLightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 79 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled and thevehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

175

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells you if thereis an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 69.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.This means the systemis ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for afew seconds when you turn the ignition key toRUN. If the light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there isa problem.

176

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN orSTART, the passenger airbag status indicator willlight ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, forseveral seconds as a system check. If you useremote start to start your vehicle from a distance(if equipped), you may not see the system check.Then, after several more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag.

There is a label on your sun visor that says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”This is because the risk to the rear-facing child isso great if the airbag deploys. Never put a rearfacing child restraint in the right front passengerseat unless passenger airbag status indicatorshows off and the airbag is off. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is failsafe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


177

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when youhave a rear-facing child restraint installedin the right front passenger’s seat, it meansthat the passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. Achild in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 79 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 176.

178

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, but the engine isnot running, as a checkto show you it is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If itstays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that you have problems with agenerator drive belt, or another electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.


179

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set yourparking brake. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not release fully. If it stays on afteryour parking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push, or the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed for service. SeeTowing Your Vehicle on page 284.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight

Your vehicle may havean Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) warninglight.

It should come on for a few seconds when you turnthe ignition key to RUN.

If the ABS warning light stays on longer than normalafter you have started your engine, turn the ignitionoff or, if the light comes on and stays on when youare driving, stop as soon as possible and turn theignition off. Then start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light still stays on, or comes on againwhile you are driving, the ABS needs service andyou do not have anti-lock brakes.

The ABS warning light should come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition key to RUN. This is normal. Ifthe light does not come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

180

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

For vehicles equippedwith the traction controlsystem, this warninglight should comeon briefly when theengine is started.

If the warning light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem. If it stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, there may be a problem with your tractioncontrol system and your vehicle may need service.When this warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

If the traction control system warning light comeson and stays on for an extended period oftime when the system is turned on, your vehicleneeds service. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 256 for more information.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight will come on whenthe engine hasoverheated.

If this happens you should pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 326 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on could cause yourvehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 326. Your vehicle could be damaged,and it might not be covered by your warranty.Never drive with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on.

This light will also come on when starting yourvehicle. If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.

181

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the gage pointer moves towards the “H”(United States) or the shaded in thermostat(Canada), it means that your engine coolant hasoverheated. If you have been operating yourvehicle under normal driving conditions, you shouldpull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 326 for moreinformation.

Tire Pressure Light

This light comes onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to RUN.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated.

A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message in theDriver Information Center (DIC) will accompanythe light. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 197 for more information.

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe todo so. If underinflated, inflate to the properpressure. See Tires on page 354 for moreinformation.


182

This light will flash for approximately 60 secondsand then stay on if a problem is detected withthe Tire Pressure Monitor system.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 363for more information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent.

This may prevent more serious damage to yourvehicle. This system is also designed to assist yourservice technician in correctly diagnosing anymalfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 297.

183

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 303.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. Aloose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

184

Did you just drive through a deep puddle ofwater?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 299. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down.

185

The diagnostic system is designed to evaluatecritical emission control systems during normaldriving. This may take several days of routinedriving. If you have done this and your vehicle stilldoes not pass the inspection for lack of OBDsystem readiness, your dealer can preparethe vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

This light tells you therecould be a problem withthe engine oil pressure.

The light goes on when you turn your key to RUN orSTART. It goes off once you start your engine. Thatis a check to be sure the light works. If it does notcome on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be thereto warn you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil is not flowing through your engine properly.You could be low on oil and you might havesome other system problem.

186

Security Light

For informationregarding this light, seeTheft-DeterrentSystems on page 107.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 161 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 155 formore information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 153.

187

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells youabout how much fuel you have remaining.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn a corneror speed up.

• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when youturn off the ignition.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).

All messages will appear in the DIC displaylocated below the speedometer in the instrumentpanel cluster. The DIC buttons are located onthe instrument panel, to the right of the instrumentpanel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After ashort delay, the DIC will display the informationthat was last displayed before the engine wasturned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected. The bottom line of theDIC shows the shift lever position indicator. SeeAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 117for more information.


188

If your vehicle has these features, the DIC alsodisplays the compass direction and the outside airtemperature when viewing the trip and fuelinformation. The compass direction appears on thetop right corner of the DIC display. The outside airtemperature automatically appears in the bottomright corner of the DIC display. If there is a problemwith the system that controls the temperaturedisplay, the numbers will be replaced with dashes.If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

The DIC also allows some features to becustomized. See DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 206 for more information.

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC has different displays which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons located onthe instrument panel, to the right of theinstrument panel cluster.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are thetrip/fuel, vehicleinformation,customization, andset/reset buttons. Thebutton functionsare detailed in thefollowing pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display theodometer, trip odometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, instantaneous economy, ActiveFuel Management™ indicator on vehicles with thisfeature, and average speed.

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button todisplay the oil life, units, tire pressure readings andTire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system programming,compass zone and compass calibration onvehicles with this feature, and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter programming.

189

U (Customization): Press this button tocustomize the feature settings on your vehicle.See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 206for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scrollthrough the following menu items:

OdometerPress the trip/fuel button until ODOMETERdisplays. This display shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km).

Trip A and Trip BPress the trip/fuel button until TRIP A or TRIP Bdisplays. This display shows the current distancetraveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km)since the last reset for each trip odometer. Bothtrip odometers can be used at the same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing the set/reset button while the desiredtrip odometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a feature called theretro-active reset. This can be used to set the tripodometer to the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was last turned on. Thiscan be used if the trip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press andhold the set/reset button for at least four seconds.The trip odometer will display the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven since theignition was last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, thetrip odometer will accumulate mileage. Forexample, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km)before it is started again, and then the retro-activereset feature is activated, the display will show5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

190

If the retro-active reset feature is activated afterthe vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,the display will show the number of miles (mi)or kilometers (km) that were driven during the lastignition cycle.

Fuel RangePress the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This display shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km)the vehicle can be driven without refueling.

The fuel range estimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle’s fuel economy over recent drivinghistory and the amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. This estimate will change if driving conditionschange. For example, if driving in traffic and makingfrequent stops, this display may read one number,but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the numbermay change even though the same amount of fuelis in the fuel tank. This is because different drivingconditions produce different fuel economies.Generally, freeway driving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVELLOW message will be displayed. See “FUELLEVEL LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 197 for more information.

Average EconomyPress the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number iscalculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time this menu item wasreset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and holdthe set/reset button. The display will return to zero.

191

Instantaneous Economy and Active FuelManagement™ IndicatorPress the trip/fuel button until INST ECONOMYdisplays. If your vehicle has the Active FuelManagement™ feature, INST ECONOMY8CYL MODE will display on vehicles with aV8 engine or INST ECONOMY 6CYL MODE willdisplay on vehicles with a V6 engine. This displayshows the current fuel economy at a particularmoment and will change frequently as drivingconditions change. This display shows theinstantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon(mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).Unlike average economy, this screen cannot bereset.

If your vehicle has the Active Fuel Management™feature, an Active Fuel Management™ indicatorwill display on the right side of the DIC, while INSTECONOMY displays on the left side. Active FuelManagement™ allows the engine to operateon either all or half of its cylinders, depending onyour driving demands.

For vehicles with a V8 engine, when Active FuelManagement™ is active, 4CYL MODE will display.When Active Fuel Management™ is inactive,8CYL MODE will display.

For vehicles with a V6 engine, when Active FuelManagement™ is active, 3CYL MODE will display.When Active Fuel Management™ is inactive,6CYL MODE will display.

See Active Fuel Management™ (3.9L V6 and 5.3LV8 Engines) on page 116 for more information.

Average SpeedPress the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE SPEEDdisplays. This display shows the average speedof the vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometersper hour (km/h). This average is calculatedbased on the various vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value. To resetthe value, press and hold the set/reset button. Thedisplay will return to zero.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

192

Vehicle Information Menu Items

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button toscroll through the following menu items:

Oil LifePress the vehicle information button until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If yousee 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display,that means 99% of the current oil life remains. Theengine oil life system will alert you to changethe oil on a schedule consistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on thedisplay. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” underDIC Warnings and Messages on page 197. Youshould change the oil as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 312. In addition to the engine oillife system monitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 410 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourselfafter each oil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other than when the oilhas just been changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, see Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 316.

UnitsPress the vehicle information button until UNITSdisplays. This display allows you to select betweenEnglish or Metric units of measurement. Once inthis display, press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units.

Tire PressureThe pressure for each tire can be viewed in theDIC. The tire pressure will be shown in eitherpounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).Press the vehicle information button until theDIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle information buttonagain until the DIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

193

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detectedby the system while driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 362 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 197 for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashesinstead of a value, there may be a problem withyour vehicle. If this consistently occurs, seeyour dealer for service.

Learn Tire PositionsTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). After rotating the tires or after replacinga tire or sensor, the Tire Pressure Monitor(TPM) system must re-learn the tire positions. Tore-learn the tire positions, see Tire PressureMonitor System on page 363. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 368 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 197 for more information.

Compass ZoneYour vehicle may have this feature. Under certaincircumstances, such as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary tocompensate for compass variance and reset thezone. To change the compass zone throughthe DIC, see DIC Compass on page 195.

Compass CalibrationThe compass can be manually calibrated. Tocalibrate the compass through the DIC, see DICCompass on page 195.

Remote KeyTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). This display allows you to match theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter toyour vehicle. To match an RKE transmitter to yourvehicle, do the following:

1. Press the vehicle information button untilPRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button.The message REMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE will display.

194

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the first transmitter at the same time forapproximately 15 seconds.A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmitters at this time,repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum of eighttransmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to OFF.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

Customization Menu Items

U (Customization): Press this button to enter thefeature settings menu. This display allows youto customize the feature settings on your vehicle.See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 206for more information.

DIC CompassYour vehicle may have a compass in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

Compass ZoneUnder certain circumstances, such as during along distance cross-country trip, it will benecessary to compensate for compass varianceand reset the zone through the DIC.

Compass variance is the difference between theearth’s magnetic north and true geographicnorth. If not adjusted to account for compassvariance, the compass in the vehicle could givefalse readings.

In order to do this, the compass must be set orcalibrated to the variance zone in which the vehicleis traveling.

195

To adjust for compass variance, use the followingprocedure:

Compass Variance Procedure1. Press the vehicle information button until

PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle’s current location andvariance zone number on the map.Zones 1 through 15 are available.

3. Press the set/reset button to scroll throughand select the appropriate variance zone.Navigate to one of the trip/fuel menu screensto view the direction the vehicle is moving.This will be shown in the top right corner of theDIC display.

4. If you need to calibrate the compass, use thecompass calibration procedure. See“Compass Calibration Procedure” following.

Compass CalibrationThe compass can be manually calibrated. Onlycalibrate the compass in a safe location wheredriving the vehicle in circles is not a problem. If“CAL” should ever appear in the DIC display, thecompass may need calibration.

196

To calibrate the compass, use the followingprocedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure

the compass zone is set to the variancezone in which the vehicle is traveling. See“Compass Variance Procedure” earlier in thissection.

2. Press the vehicle information button until thePRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPASSscreen is displayed.

3. Press the set/reset button to start the compasscalibration.

4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVEIN CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in circles atless than 5 mph (8 km/h) to completethe calibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETE when thecalibration is complete.

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another. Some messagesmay not require immediate action, but you canpress the set/reset button to acknowledge that youreceived the message and clear it from the DICdisplay. Pressing any of the DIC buttons alsoacknowledges and clears any messages. Somemessages cannot be cleared from the DIC displaybecause they are more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can be cleared.You should take any messages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember that clearingthe messages will only make the messagesdisappear, not correct the problem. The followingare the possible messages that can be displayedand some information about them.

197

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned off. See Exterior Lamps onpage 158 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ONThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned on. See Exterior Lamps onpage 158 for more information.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detectsthat the battery voltage is dropping beyond areasonable level. The battery saver system startsreducing certain features of the vehicle thatyou may be able to notice. At the point that thefeatures are disabled, this message is displayed. Itmeans that the vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow thebattery to recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when service is requiredfor the vehicle. See your dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 312 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 410 for more information.

Acknowledging the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING.That must be done at the OIL LIFE screenunder the vehicle information menu. See “Oil Life”under DIC Operation and Displays on page 189and Engine Oil Life System on page 316.

198

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when the tire pressure inone of the tires needs to be checked. Thismessage also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHTFRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatewhich tire needs to be checked. You can receivemore than one tire pressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that may have beensent at the same time, press the set/reset button.If a tire pressure message appears on theDIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tirepressures checked and set to those shown on theTire Loading Information Label. See Tires onpage 354, Loading Your Vehicle on page 279, andInflation - Tire Pressure on page 362. The DICdisplay also shows the tire pressure values for thefront and rear tires by pressing the vehicleinformation button. See DIC Operation andDisplays on page 189. If the tire pressure is low,the low tire pressure warning light comes on.See Tire Pressure Light on page 182.

DRIVER DOOR OPENThis message displays when the driver’s door is notclosed properly. When this message appears,make sure that the driver’s door is closedcompletely.

ENGINE HOT A/C(Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioning compressor isautomatically turned off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the A/C operationautomatically resumes. You can continue todrive your vehicle. If this message continues toappear, have the system repaired by your dealeras soon as possible to avoid compressordamage.

199

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OILThis message displays when the vehicle’s engineoil is low. Fill the oil to the proper level as soon aspossible. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 308 for the engine oil fill location. Also, seeEngine Oil on page 312 for information on the kindof oil to use and the proper oil level.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Donot increase the engine speed above normalidling speed. See Engine Overheating onpage 326 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appears onthe instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stopthe vehicle as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 326 for more information.

This message displays along with a continuouschime when the engine has overheated. Stop andturn the engine off immediately to avoid severeengine damage. See Engine Overheating onpage 326.

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message displays when the vehicle’s enginepower is reduced. Reduced engine power canaffect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If thismessage is on, but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should be takento your dealer for service as soon as possible.

200

ERRORThis message displays while viewing the odometeror trip odometers if there is a problem with theinstrument panel cluster. See your dealer forservice.

FUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays when your vehicle is lowon fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 188 and Filling the Tankon page 303 for more information.

HOOD OPENIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays when the hood is not closedproperly. When this message appears, make surethat the hood is closed completely. See HoodRelease on page 307.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CAREThis message displays when the outside airtemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays when the driver’s side reardoor is not closed properly. When this messageappears, make sure that the driver’s side rear dooris closed completely.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle whilethe engine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 312 for more information.

This message displays when the vehicle’sengine oil pressure is low. The oil pressure lightalso appears on the instrument panel cluster. SeeOil Pressure Light on page 186.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damagecan result from driving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealeras soon as possible when this message isdisplayed.

201

PASSENGER DOOR OPENThis message displays when the front passenger’sdoor is not closed properly. When this messageappears, make sure that the front passenger’sdoor is closed completely.

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays while you are matching aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter toyour vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 93 and DIC Operationand Displays on page 189 for more information.

REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYThis message displays when the battery inthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needsto be replaced. To replace the battery, see“Battery Replacement” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 93.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays when the passenger’s siderear door is not closed properly. When thismessage appears, make sure that the passenger’sside rear door is closed completely.

SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)SYSTEMThis message displays when the electronicsensors that control the air conditioning andheating systems are no longer working. Have theclimate control system serviced by your dealerif you notice a drop in heating and air conditioningefficiency.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problemwith the airbag system. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 176 for more information.

202

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the generator and battery charging systems.Driving with this problem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stopand turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. Have the electrical system checked by yourdealer immediately.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays when service is requiredon the brake system. Have the brake systemserviced by your dealer as soon as possible. Thebrake system warning light also appears onthe instrument panel cluster when this messageappears on the DIC. See Brake System WarningLight on page 179.

SERVICE POWER STEERINGThis message displays when a problem isdetected with the power steering system. Whenthis message is displayed, you may notice that theeffort required to steer the vehicle increases orfeels heavier, but you will still be able to steer thevehicle. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately.

SERVICE THEFT SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the theft-deterrent system programmed in thekey. A fault has been detected in the systemwhich means that the system is disabled and it isnot protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usuallyrestarts; however, you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine.See PASS-Key® III+ Operation on page 109 formore information.

203

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMThis message displays if a part on the TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system is not workingproperly. If you drive your vehicle while any of thefour sensors are missing or inoperable, thewarning comes on in about 20 minutes. A sensorwould be missing, for example, if you putdifferent wheels on your vehicle withouttransferring the sensors. If the warning comes onand stays on, there may be a problem with theTPM. See your dealer.

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLIf your vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), this message displays when the system isnot functioning properly. A warning light alsoappears on the instrument panel cluster. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) Warning Light onpage 181. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 256 for more information. Have the TCSserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when there is a problemwith the transaxle. See your dealer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissionsrelated malfunction occurs. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

STARTING DISABLED SERVICETHROTTLEThis message displays if the starting of the engineis disabled due to the electronic throttle controlsystem. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealerimmediately.

This message only appears while the ignition is inRUN, and will not disappear until the problemis resolved.

This message cannot be acknowledged.

THEFT ATTEMPTEDThis message displays if the content theft-deterrentsystem has detected a break-in attempt whileyou were away from your vehicle. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 107 for more information.

204

TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message may be displayed if the gas cap isnot on, or is not fully tightened. Check the gascap to ensure that it is on properly. See Filling theTank on page 303 for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays when the Tire PressureMonitor (TPM) system is re-learning the tirepositions. See Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 363. The tire positions must be re-learnedafter rotating the tires or after replacing a tireor sensor. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 368 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 362for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFIf your vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), this message displays when the TCS turnsoff. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 256 for more information.

This message only displays while the ignition is inRUN and disappears after 10 seconds, unlessit is acknowledged or an urgent warning appears.

Any of the following conditions may cause theTCS to turn off:

• The TCS is turned off by pressing the tractioncontrol button. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 256 for more information.

• The battery is low.

• There is a TCS failure. See your dealer forservice.

TRACTION CONTROL ONIf your vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), this message displays when the TCSis turned on. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 256 for more information.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINEThis message displays when the transaxle fluid inyour vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle andallow it to idle until it cools down. If the warningmessage continues to display, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

205

TRUNK OPENThis message displays when the trunk is notclosed completely. Make sure that the trunk isclosed completely. See Trunk on page 103.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays as a reminder to turn offthe turn signal if you drive your vehicle formore than about 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turnsignal on. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever onpage 151.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhen the ignition is in RUN. The message willnot disappear until the turn signal is manuallyturned off, or a turn is completed.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDThis message displays when the windshieldwasher fluid is low. Fill the windshield washerreservoir as soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 308 for thelocation of the windshield washer reservoir. Also,see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 336 formore information.

DIC Vehicle CustomizationYour vehicle has customization capabilities thatallow you to program certain features to onepreferred setting. Customization features can onlybe programmed to one setting on the vehicleand cannot be programmed to a preferred settingfor two different drivers.

All of the customization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable will be displayed on your DIC.

The default settings for the customization featureswere set when your vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from their defaultstate since then.

The customization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

To change customization preferences, use thefollowing procedure.

206

Entering the Feature Settings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in

PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the customization button to enter thefeature settings menu.If the menu is not available, FEATURESETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK will display.Before entering the menu, make sure thevehicle is in PARK (P).

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allowyou to program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISHThis feature will only display if a language otherthan English has been set. This feature allows youto change the language in which the DICmessages appear to English.

Press the customization button until thePRESS V TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screenappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to display all DIC messages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages will appear.

Press the customization button until the DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following choices:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear inEnglish.

FRANCAIS (French): All messages will appear inFrench.

ESPANOL (Spanish): All messages will appearin Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.

Select one of the available choices and press theset/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

207

AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or not toturn off the automatic door unlocking feature. Italso allows you to select which doors andwhen the doors will automatically unlock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Unlock onpage 102 for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following choices:

OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s doorwill unlock when the key is taken out of theignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlockwhen the key is taken out of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).



REMOTE DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking the vehiclewith the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.You will not receive feedback when lockingthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter if any of thedoors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 93 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following choices:

HORN & LIGHTS OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

208

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flashwhen you press the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the secondpress of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressed again within fiveseconds of the previous command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when unlocking thevehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receive feedback whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitterif the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation on page 93 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following choices:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flashwhen you press the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter.



209

EXIT LIGHTINGIf it is dark enough outside, this feature allows youto select the amount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on. This happens afterthe key is turned from RUN to OFF.

Press the customization button until EXITLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on forone minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on fortwo minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select whether or not tohave the exterior lights turn on briefly duringlow light periods after unlocking the vehicle usingthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when youunlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, theexterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlockthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or untilthe lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 93for more information.

210



CHIME VOLUMEThis feature allows you to select the volume levelof the chime.

Press the customization button until CHIMEVOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be setto a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loudlevel.



REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toturn the remote start off or on. The remotestart feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using your Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See “Remote VehicleStart” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 93 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTESTART appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.



211

FACTORY SETTINGSThis feature allows you to set all of thecustomization features back to their factory defaultsettings.

Press the customization button until FACTORYSETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

RESTORE ALL (default): The customizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: The customization featureswill not be set to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGSThis feature allows you to exit the FEATURESETTINGS menu.

Press the customization button until FEATURESETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears inthe DIC display. Press the set/reset button to exitthe menu.

If you do not exit, pressing the customizationbutton again will return you to the beginning of theFEATURE SETTINGS menu.

Exiting the Feature Settings MenuThe feature settings menu will be exited when anyof the following occurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.

• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttonsare pressed.

• The end of the feature settings menu isreached and exited.

• A 40 second time period has elapsed with noselection made.

212

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 248. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 248.

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

213

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits. If sound equipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 113 for more information.

Setting the Time (Without DateDisplay)If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with asingle CD player and preset buttons numbered onethrough six, the radio will have a clock buttonfor setting the time. You can set the time byfollowing these steps:

1. Press the clock button until the hour numbersbegin flashing on the display. Press the clockbutton a second time and the minutenumbers will begin flashing on the display.

2. While either the hour or the minute numbersare flashing, turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decreasethe time. Instead of using the tune knob, youcan also press the SEEK, FWD (forward),or REV (reverse) buttons to adjust the time.

3. Press the clock button again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set the currentlydisplayed time; otherwise, the flashing will stopafter five seconds and the current timedisplayed will be automatically set.

214

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour, press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrow label.Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,press the pushbutton located under the desiredoption to select the default. Press the clock buttonagain to apply the selected default, or let thescreen time out.

Setting the Time (With Date Display)If your vehicle has a radio with a single CDplayer, the radio has a clock button for setting thetime and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, andyear) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turnthe tune knob, located on the upperright side of the radio, to adjust the selectedsetting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the clockbutton when the radio is on. The date with displaytimes out after a few seconds and goes back tothe normal radio and time display.

If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio has a MENU button instead ofthe clock button to set the time and date.

215

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption is displayed.

3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turn thetune knob, located on the upper right side ofthe radio, to adjust the selected setting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the MENUbutton and then the clock button when the radio ison. The date with display times out after afew seconds and goes back to the normal radioand time display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default settingfrom month/day/year to day/month/year, followthese instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrowlabel. Once the time 12H and 24H, andthe date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock or MENU button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

216

Radio with CD (Base)

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

The radio goes to the previous volume settingwhenever the radio is turned on. The volume canstill be adjusted by using the volume knob.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

217

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for three seconds until a beepsounds. When that pushbutton is pressed andreleased, the station that was set, returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for eachpushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass ortreble, press the tune knob or the pushbuttonslocated under the BASS/TREB display, until thedesired tone control label displays. Turn the tuneknob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the setting. Adjust the setting by pressingeither the SEEK, FWD (forward), or REV (reverse)buttons. The current bass or treble level displays. Ifa station’s frequency is weak, or has static,decrease the treble.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual appears on the display or startto manually adjust the bass or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust thebalance or fade, press this button or the tune knobuntil the desired speaker control label displays.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the setting. The setting can also beadjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD, orREV buttons.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for yourvehicle and it must be returned to your dealer forservice.

218

Loc (Locked): This message displays while theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording,the quality of the music that has been recorded,and the way the CD-R has been handled.

There can be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface of theCD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 244for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

219

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button toeject the CD. If the CD is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD automatically pulls backinto the player.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow isheld or pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thispushbutton to advance playback quickly within atrack. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this pushbutton to resume playingthe track. The elapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, youcan listen to CD tracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, do the following:

1. Press this button to play tracks from the CDyou are listening to in random order. Therandom icon displays.

2. Press this button again to turn off random play.The random icon disappears from the display.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entireCD can be repeated.

• To repeat the track you are listening to,press and release the RPT button. An arrowsymbol displays. Press RPT again to turnoff repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for a few seconds.An arrow symbol displays. Press RPT again toturn off repeat play. When repeat is off, thesymbol no longer displays.

220

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the track number, elapsed time ofthe track, and the time. When the ignition is off,press this button to display the time.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand track number displays while a CD is inthe player. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice such as a portable audio player.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displaysand/or the CD ejects, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returnsto normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD-R.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer while reporting theproblem.

221

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 248 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need tomake additional volume adjustments from theportable device.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found” displays.

222

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available.

While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, thestation name or call letters display. In rare cases, aradio station can broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio withSix-Disc CD (MP3) similar

223

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhenSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise as youspeed up or slow down while driving. That way, thevolume level should sound about the same asyou drive. To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.

2. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTOVOLUM (automatic volume) label on the radiodisplay.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desiredSpeed Compensated Volume setting(OFF, Low, Med (medium), or High) to selectthe level of radio volume compensation.

The display times out after approximately10 seconds. Each higher setting allowsfor more radio volume compensation at fastervehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

224

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, orMP3 song. A choice of additional informationsuch as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT(category) can appear. Continue pressing theinformation button to highlight the desired label, orpress the pushbutton positioned under any oneof the labels and the information about thatlabel displays.

While information is not available, No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is in PARK (P). Tuneto your favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls if the vehiclehas this feature. See Defensive Driving onpage 248.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations canbe programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. Whenever thatpushbutton is pressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

225

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tuneknob until the tone control labels display.Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, orpress the pushbutton positioned under thedesired label.

Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the highlighted setting. The highlightedsetting can also be adjusted by pressing either theSEEK, FWD (forward) or REV (reverse) buttonuntil the desired levels are obtained. If a station’sfrequency is weak, or has static, decrease thetreble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID (midrange), or TREB (treble)label for more than two seconds. A beep soundsand the level adjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual displays or start to manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

226

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels display. Continue pressing tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn thetune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjustthe highlighted setting. The highlighted settingcan also be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK,FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button untilthe desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency displays. Press the CAT button todisplay the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

227

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category displays or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio does not allow you to remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving faster than5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for yourvehicle and it must be returned to your dealer forservice.

Locked: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up theradio. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 240 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

228

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. A beep sounds and Load AllDiscs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays onthe CD. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 244 for more information.

229



Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. Ifthe CD is not removed, after several seconds, theCD automatically pulls back into the player andbegin playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the ejectbutton for two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the rightSEEK arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEKarrow is held, or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the track.The elapsed time of the track displays.

230

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be played in random, rather thansequential order, on one CD or all CDs in asix-disc CD player. To use random, do one of thefollowing:

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CDplayer, insert a disc partway into the slot ofthe CD player. A RDM label displays.To play the tracks from the single CD inrandom order, press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the pushbutton again toturn off random play.

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CDplayer, press and hold the LOAD button. Abeep sounds and Load All Discs displays.Insert one or more discs partway into the slotof the CD player.To play tracks from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDMlabel until Randomize All Discs displays. Pressthe same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Aux Input Device Founddisplays.

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have theMP3 feature. If it has this feature, it is capable ofplaying an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. Formore information on how to play an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 233later in this section.

231

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displaysand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer while reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 248 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need tomake additional volume adjustments from theportable device.

232

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, No Aux Input Device Found displays.

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recordedwith the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps,and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artistname, and album can display when files arerecorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3/WMA files. By default the radio reads onlythe uncompressed audio and ignores theMP3 files. Pressing the CAT (category) buttontoggles between compressed and uncompressedaudio format.

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• Make sure the CD does not have more than50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files to readand play.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

233

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .m3u or .wplextension (other file extensions may not work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists can cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlistsor sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc cancause the disc not to function in the player.

Change playlists by using the previous and nextfolder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. If a CD-R containsmore than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,and 255 files, the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum cannot be accessed.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as afolder. If the root directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. Allfiles contained directly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains onlyfolders/subfolders and no compressed filesdirectly beneath them, the player advances to thenext folder in the file structure that containscompressed audio files. The empty folder is notnumbered or displayed.

234

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files,the files are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions do not function ona CD-R that was recorded without folders orplaylists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons searches playlists (Px)first and then goes to the root folder. Whenthe radio displays the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name thatis contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays thefile name without the extension (such as .mp3) asthe track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or fourpages are shortened. The display does not showparts of words on the last page of text and theextension of the filename is not displayed.

235

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, you do nothave playlist editing capability using the radio.These playlists are treated as special folderscontaining compressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CDPlayer), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-Rshould begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R inthe player it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in thesame manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Careof Your CDs on page 244 for more information.



236

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught inthe CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recorded CD with amarking pen.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in thissection.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD-R can be removed.If the CD-R is not removed, after several seconds,the CD-R automatically pulls back into the playerand begins playing. For the Six-Disc CD player,press and hold the eject button for two seconds toeject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on theCD-R currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current MP3 file, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next MP3 file. If either SEEKarrow is held or pressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward or forward throughMP3 files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the file. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

237

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3files can be played on the CD-R in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD-R or all discsin a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

1. To play MP3 files in random order from theCD-R that is currently playing, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Random Current Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in orderby artist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The player scansthe disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3tag information. It can take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the number of MP3 filesrecorded to the CD-R. The radio might beginplaying while it is scanning the disc in thebackground. When the scan is finished, the CD-Rbegins playing again.

Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults toplaying MP3 files in order by artist. The currentartist playing is shown on the second line ofthe display between the arrows. Once all songs bythat artist are played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order on the CD-R andbegins playing MP3 files by that artist. If youwant to listen to MP3 files by another artist, pressthe pushbutton located below either arrowbutton. The CD goes to the next or previous artistin alphabetical order. Continue pressing eitherbutton until the desired artist displays.

238

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below theSort By label. From the sort screen, push one ofthe buttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the albumname displays on the second line betweenthe arrows and songs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songs from that albumhave played, the player moves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD-R and beginsplaying MP3 files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press thepushbutton below the Back label to return tonormal MP3 playback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays while a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Aux Input Device Founddisplays.

239

XM Radio MessagesRadio Display Message Condition Action RequiredXL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

Channel Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No CAT Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

240

Radio Display Message Condition Action RequiredCAT Not Found No channel available for

the chosen categoryThere are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Theft Locked Theftlock® active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messagedisplays after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourdealer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theftof your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it does not operateand LOCKED displays.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio cannotoperate if stolen.

241

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

The audio steeringwheel controls may bedifferent dependingon your vehicle’soptions. Some audiocontrols can be adjustedat the steering wheel.They include thefollowing:

xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or to the previous radiostation stored as a favorite.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track.

g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and releasethis button to silence the system. Press andrelease this button again, to turn the sound on.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and holdthis button for longer than one second to interactwith the OnStar system. See the OnStar®

System on page 128 in this manual for moreinformation.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween AM, FM, XM (if equipped), CD, and AUXjack.

+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minusbutton to increase or to decrease the radio volume.

¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to thenext radio station and stay there.

242

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet. Ifthere is interference or static, unplug the item fromthe accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stations willboost the power levels during the day, and thenreduce these levels during the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tallbuildings or hills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fade in and out. Inaddition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of theXM™ signal for a period of time. The radio maydisplay NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.

243

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rearwindow defogger, located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of the rear window isnot scratched and that the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface is damaged, it couldinterfere with radio reception. Also, for proper radioreception, the antenna connector at the top-centerof the rear window needs to be properly attached tothe post on the glass.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distort theincoming radio reception. Any damage causedto your backglass antenna due to metallictinting materials will not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window may damage therear window antenna and/or the rear windowdefogger. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not clear the inside rear windowwith sharp objects.

244

Because this antenna is built into your rear window,there is a reduced risk of damage caused by carwashes and vandals.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rear windowdefogger is turned on, it could mean that a defoggergrid line has been damaged. If this is true, the gridline must be repaired.

If you choose to add a cellular telephone to yourvehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached tothe glass, make sure that you do not damage thegrid lines for the AM-FM antenna. There is enoughspace between the lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna without interfering with radioreception.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on theroof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance ofthe XM™ system may be affected if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

245

✍ NOTES

246

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 248Defensive Driving ...................................... 248Drunken Driving ........................................ 249Control of a Vehicle .................................. 252Braking ...................................................... 252Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 253Braking in Emergencies ............................. 255Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 256Steering .................................................... 257Off-Road Recovery .................................... 260Passing ..................................................... 260Loss of Control .......................................... 262Driving at Night ......................................... 263Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 264

City Driving ............................................... 267Freeway Driving ........................................ 268Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 269Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 270Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 270Winter Driving ........................................... 272If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 278Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 278Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 279

Towing ........................................................ 284Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 284Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 284Towing a Trailer ........................................ 286

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

247

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 20.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

248

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

249

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generallywill reach a higher BAC level than a man ofher same body weight will when each has thesame number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

250

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

251

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make yourvehicle go where you want it to go. They are thebrakes, the steering, and the accelerator. Allthree systems have to do their work at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 256.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 297.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 179.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

252

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light on theinstrument panel clusterwill come on briefly whenyou start your vehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you begin todrive away, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this test isgoing on, and you may even notice that your brakepedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

253

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

254

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You mayfeel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice somenoise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and holdit down — may be the wrong thing to do. Yourwheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehiclecannot respond to your steering.

Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it washeaded when the wheels stopped rolling. Thatcould be off the road, into the very thing you weretrying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want to squeezethe brakes hard without locking the wheels. If youhear or feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brakepedal. This will help you retain steering control. Ifyou do have ABS, it is different. See Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) on page 253.

In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

255

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a traction control systemthat limits wheel spin. This is especially useful inslippery road conditions. The system operates onlyif it senses that one or both of the front wheels arespinning or beginning to lose traction. When thishappens, the system reduces engine power andmay also upshift the transaxle and apply the frontbrakes to limit wheel spin.

This light will flashwhen your tractioncontrol system is limitingwheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.If your vehicle is in cruise control when thetraction control system begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, you may re-engage the cruisecontrol. See Cruise Control on page 155.

The traction control system operates in all transaxleshift lever positions. But the system can upshift thetransaxle only as high as the shift lever positionyou’ve chosen, so you should use the lower gearsonly when necessary. See Automatic TransaxleOperation on page 117.

When the system is on,this warning light willcome on and stay on tolet you know if there’sa problem.

A SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message willalso appear on the DIC. When this warninglight is on, the system will not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 197 for more information.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the tractioncontrol system on. But you can turn the system offif you ever need to. You should turn the systemoff if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud orsnow and rocking the vehicle is required.

256

See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out onpage 278 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 278 for moreinformation.

To turn the system onor off, press the tractioncontrol button locatedon the left side ofthe instrument panel.

When you turn the system off, a chime will sound,the traction control warning light will come onand stay on and a TRACTION CONTROL OFFmessage will appear on the DIC. If the tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin whenyou press the button to turn the system off, thewarning light will come on and the system will turnoff right away.

You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again. The traction control lightshould go off.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 297 for more information.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.

Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

257

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, andyour speed. While you are in a curve, speed isthe one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Easeup on the brake or accelerator pedal, steerthe vehicle the way you want it to go, andslow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


258

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you come overa hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked cars and stops right infront of you. You can avoid these problems bybraking — if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou cannot; there is not room. That is the time forevasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes — but, unlessyou have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock yourwheels.

See Braking on page 252. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoidedthe object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

259

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so that yourvehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.

You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarterturn until the right front tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the

sides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

260

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead thatmight indicate a turn or an intersection, delayyour pass. A broken center line usuallyindicates it is all right to pass, providing theroad ahead is clear. Never cross a solid line onyour side of the lane or a double solid line, evenif the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

261

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid arebest handled by easing your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

262

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. Ifyou do not have ABS, then in a braking skid,where the wheels are no longer rolling, releaseenough pressure on the brakes to get the wheelsrolling again. This restores steering control.Push the brake pedal down steadily when youhave to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels arerolling, you will have steering control.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark.

263

When you are faced with severe glare, as from adriver who does not lower the high beams, ora vehicle with misaimed headlamps, slow down alittle. Avoid staring directly into the approachingheadlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

264

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen ifa lot of water is standing on the road. If youcan see reflections from trees, telephone poles, orother vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

265

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badlydamage your engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.



As little as six inches of flowing watercan carry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 354.

266

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 268.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be runningthe red light.

267

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it isslower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

268

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to maketoo many miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you will find experienced and able service expertsin GM dealerships all across North America. Theywill be ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

269

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,

with a comfortably cool interior.• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead

and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

270

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you canclimb the hill better.

271

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in the trunk.

Also see Tires on page 354.

272

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bagsto help provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

273

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

274

If your vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), it will improve your ability to accelerate whendriving on a slippery road. Even though your vehiclehas a traction system you will want to slow downand adjust your driving to the road conditions.Under certain conditions, you may want to turn theTCS off, such as when driving through deep snowand loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion atlower speeds. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 256.

If your vehicle does not have TCS, accelerategently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If youaccelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spinand polish the surface under the tires even more.

Unless your vehicle has the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), you will want to brake very gently,too. If your vehicle does have ABS, see Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) on page 253. ABS improvesyour vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Whether your vehicle has ABSor not, you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. Without ABS, if youfeel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakesa little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to getthe most traction you can.

Remember, unless your vehicle has ABS, if youbrake so hard that the wheels stop rolling, yourvehicle will just slide. Brake so the wheels alwayskeep rolling and you can still steer.

• Whatever your vehicle’s braking system, allowgreater following distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.On an otherwise clear road, ice patches mayappear in shaded areas where the sun cannotreach, such as around clumps of trees, behindbuildings, or under bridges. Sometimes thesurface of a curve or an overpass may remainicy when the surrounding roads are clear. If yousee a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

275

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap around yourselfor tuck under your clothing to keep warm. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be

careful.

276

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases underyour vehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so you mightnot know it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run the engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it goa little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withthe headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

277

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out whenyou are stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transaxle orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)as shown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spinthe wheels too fast while shifting the transaxleback and forth, you can destroy the transaxle.See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out onpage 278.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 376.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.If your vehicle has traction control, you should turnthe traction control system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 256. Then shiftback and forth between REVERSE (R) anda forward gear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may freeyour vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it may need to be towed out.If your vehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing Your Vehicle on page 284.

278

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it may properly carry,the Tire and Loading Information label andthe Vehicle Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you willfind the label attached below the door lock post(striker). The Tire and Loading Information labellists the number of occupant seating positions (A),and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds. The vehicle capacity weightincludes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.

Label Example

279

The Tire and Loading Information label also lists thetire size of the original equipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). Formore information on tires and inflation, see Tires onpage 354 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 362.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 286 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

280

Item Description Total

AMaximum VehicleCapacity Weight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

281



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’smaximum vehicle capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is found onthe rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

Example 3

282

If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load,spread it out. See “Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in this section.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If things like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else are put inside the vehicle, they willgo as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

283

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 434.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind amotorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behinda motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing are known as“dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”(towing your vehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on a device knownas a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 269.

284

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed withall four wheels on the ground. If your vehiclemust be towed, you should use a dolly. See“Dolly Towing” that follows for more information.

Dolly Towing

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To towyour vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition.

5. Release the parking brake.

285

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Pull a trailer only ifyou have followed all the steps in thissection. Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped withthe proper trailer towing equipment. To identifywhat the vehicle trailering capacity is for yourvehicle, you should read the information in “Weightof the Trailer” that appears later in this section.But trailering is different than just driving yourvehicle by itself. Trailering means changesin handling, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forcedto work harder against the drag of the addedweight. The engine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

286

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving. Agood source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch dealer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicle isdriven. Your engine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to dowith weight:

• the weight of the trailer

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs(454 kg). But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. And, it canalso depend on any special equipment that youhave on your vehicle.

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice. Also, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 432 for moreinformation.

287

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. And ifyou tow a trailer, you must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your vehicle will be carryingthat weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 279 for more information about your vehicle’smaximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B).

288

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t, you may beable to get them right simply by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on theTire and Loading Information label, See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 279. Then be sure you don’tgo over the GVW limit for your vehicle, includingthe weight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roadsare a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is notintended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitch that doesnot attach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the bodyof your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?If you do, then be sure to seal the holes laterwhen you remove the hitch. If you don’t sealthem, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from yourexhaust can get into your vehicle. See EngineExhaust on page 124. Dirt and water can, too.

289

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains betweenyour vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes? Be sureto read and follow the instructions for thetrailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.

• If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not try totap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,both brake systems won’t work well, or at all.

• Even if your vehicle doesn’t have anti-lockbrakes, don’t tap into your vehicle’s brakesystem if the trailer’s brake system will usemore than 0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid fromyour vehicle’s master cylinder. If it does, bothbraking systems won’t work well. You couldeven lose your brakes.

• Will the trailer brake parts take 3,000 psi(20 650 kPa) of pressure? If not, the trailerbrake system must not be used with yourvehicle.

• If everything checks out this far, then makethe brake fluid tap at the upper rear mastercylinder port. But don’t use copper tubingfor this. If you do, it will bend and break off.Use steel brake tubing.

290

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourselfwith the feel of handling and braking with the addedweight of the trailer. And always keep in mind thatthe vehicle you are driving is now a good deallonger and not nearly as responsive as your vehicleis by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch andplatform (and attachments), safety chains,electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirroradjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, startyour vehicle and trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps andany trailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, justmove that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

291

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making very sharpturns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may needadditional wiring. Check with your dealer. Thearrows on your instrument panel will flash wheneveryou signal a turn or lane change. Properly hookedup, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling otherdrivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if thebulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you maythink drivers behind you are seeing your signalwhen they are not. It’s important to checkoccasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

292

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduceyour speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reducethe possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

Notice: When the outside temperature isabove 100° F (38° C) and/or there is a steep,continuous grade, the recommended speedwhen towing is 55 mph (88 km/h) or less.Extended higher than normal engine andtransaxle temperatures may damage yourvehicle.

If you have overdrive, you may want to drive inTHIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D).

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. Ifsomething goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into

PARK (P) yet.2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer

wheels.3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release

the regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

293

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the

pedal down while you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear ofthe chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. See the MaintenanceSchedule for more on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil,drive belts, cooling system and brake system.Each of these is covered in this manual, and theIndex will help you find them quickly. If you’retrailering, it’s a good idea to review this informationbefore you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 326.

294

Service ........................................................ 297Accessories and Modifications ................... 297California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 298Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 298Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ...................................... 299Fuel ............................................................. 299

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 299Gasoline Specifications .............................. 300California Fuel ........................................... 300Additives ................................................... 300Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ............................ 301Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 302Filling the Tank ......................................... 303Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 305

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 306Hood Release ........................................... 307Engine Compartment Overview .................. 308Engine Oil ................................................. 312Engine Oil Life System .............................. 316Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 318Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 319Engine Coolant .......................................... 323Pressure Cap ............................................ 326

Engine Overheating ................................... 326Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ..................................... 329Cooling System ......................................... 329Power Steering Fluid ................................. 335Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 336Brakes ...................................................... 337Battery ...................................................... 340Jump Starting ............................................ 341

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 346Bulb Replacement ....................................... 346

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 346Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ............. 347Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .............. 349License Plate Lamp ................................... 351Replacement Bulbs ................................... 351

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 352Tires ............................................................ 354

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 355Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 359Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 362

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

295

Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 363Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 368When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 369Buying New Tires ...................................... 370Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 372Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 372Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 374Wheel Replacement .................................. 374Tire Chains ............................................... 376If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 377Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 378Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 379Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 381Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 387Compact Spare Tire .................................. 389

Appearance Care ........................................ 390Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 390Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 391Leather ...................................................... 392Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 393Care of Safety Belts .................................. 393Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 394

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 394Finish Care ............................................... 394Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 395Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 396Tires ......................................................... 396Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 397Finish Damage .......................................... 397Underbody Maintenance ............................ 397Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 397Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 398

Vehicle Identification .................................. 399Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 399Service Parts Identification Label ............... 399

Electrical System ........................................ 400Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 400Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 400Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 400Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 400Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 400Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 401Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 402

Capacities and Specifications .................... 405

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

296

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

297

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 447.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 84.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 423.

298

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehiclecan affect the airflow around it. This may causewind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer before addingequipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To helpkeep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the use ofgasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) shows the code letter or number thatidentifies your engine. You will find the VIN at thetop left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 399.If your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code Konly), you may use either regular unleaded gasolineor ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85);also see Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 301. Inall other engines, use only regular unleadedgasoline.

Gasoline OctaneFor all vehicles except those with the 5.3LV8 engine (VIN Code C), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is less than 87, youmay notice an audible knocking noise whenyou drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. Ifthis occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher as soon as possible. If you are usinggasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hearheavy knocking, your engine needs service.

If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN CodeC), use premium unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 91 or higher. You mayalso use regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s accelerationmay be slightly reduced, and you may notice aslight audible knocking noise, commonly referredto as spark knock. If the octane is less than87, you may notice a heavy knocking noise whenyou drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.Otherwise, you might damage your engine. Ifyou are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higherand you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

299

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives onpage 300 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. See theunderhood emission control label. If this fuel is notavailable in states adopting California emissionsstandards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily onfuels meeting federal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on and yourvehicle may fail a smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 183. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be covered by yourwarranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your GM dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such asethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolinesmay be available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines ifthey comply with the specifications describedearlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and otherfuels containing more than 10% ethanol must notbe used in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

300

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealerfor service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) shows the code letter or number thatidentifies your engine. You will find the VIN at thetop left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 399.

If your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code Konly), you may use either regular unleaded gasolineor ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85);also see Fuel on page 299. In all other engines,including the 3.5L V6 (VIN Code N), use onlyregular unleaded gasoline.

Only vehicles that have the 3.5L V6 engine (VINCode K) may use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). GeneralMotors encourages the use of E85 in vehiclesthat are designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 isa “renewable” fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as corn and other crops.

Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanolfuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Departmentof Energy has an alternative fuels website(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html) that can help you find E85 fuel. Thosestations that do have E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if theethanol content is greater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798.

301

To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, theE85 fuel must be formulated properly for yourclimate according to ASTM specification D 5798.If you have trouble starting on E85, it may bebecause your E85 fuel is not properly formulated foryour climate. If this happens, switching to gasolineor adding gasoline to your fuel tank may improvestarting. For good starting and heater efficiencybelow 32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tankshould contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is bestnot to alternate repeatedly between gasoline andE85. If you do switch fuels, it is recommended thatyou add as much fuel as possible — do not addless than five gallons (18.9 L) when refueling. Youshould drive the vehicle immediately after refuelingfor at least seven miles (11 km) to allow the vehicleto adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.

E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, soyou will need to refill your fuel tank more oftenwhen using E85 than when you are using gasoline.See Filling the Tank on page 303.

Notice: Some additives are not compatiblewith E85 fuel and may harm your fuel system.Damage caused by additives would not becovered by your new vehicle warranty. Do notuse additives with E85 fuel.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

302

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Ifthe vehicle has E85 fuel capability, a yellow capwith the words “E85/gasoline” can be seen.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it;if the cap is released too soon, it will springback to the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap on thehook on the inside of the fuel door.

303

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 394.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 183.

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will bedisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) ifthe fuel cap is not properly installed. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 197 for moreinformation.

304

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 183.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

305

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can startup and injure you even when the engineis not running. Keep hands, clothing,and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

306

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the interior hoodrelease handle withthis symbol on it.It is located tothe left of theparking brakepedal.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle andrelease the secondary hood latch, locatednear the center of the hood front, by pushingthe latch to the right.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then pull the hood down andclose it firmly.

307

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 3.5L engine (3.9L similar), here is what you will see:

308

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 336.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 340.C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse

Block on page 402.D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 341.E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking

Coolant” under Cooling System on page 329.F. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 326.G. Power Steering Fluid Cap. See Power

Steering Fluid on page 335.

H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 312.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 312.

J. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transaxle Fluid on page 319.

K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 337.

L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 318.

309

When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:

310

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 336.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 340.C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse

Block on page 402.D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 341.E. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 326.F. Power Steering Fluid Cap. See Power

Steering Fluid on page 335.G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 312.

H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 312.

I. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transaxle Fluid on page 319.

J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 337.

K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 318.

L. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “CheckingCoolant” under Cooling System on page 329.

311

Engine OilIf the ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL messageappears in the Driver Information Center (DIC), itmeans you need to check the engine oil levelright away. For more information, see DICWarnings and Messages on page 197. You shouldcheck the engine oil level regularly; this is anadded reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 308for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

312

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, you will need to add at least onequart/liter of oil. But you must use the rightkind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 405.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 308 for thelocation of the engine oilfill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range in thecross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

V6 Engine

V8 Engine

313

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You shouldlook for and use only an oil that meetsGM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

314

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that areidentified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M andhave the starburst symbol on the front of the oilcontainer.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C),it is recommended that you use either anSAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil.Both will provide easier cold starting and betterprotection for the engine at extremely lowtemperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

315

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will come on. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 197.

Change your oil as soon as possible within thenext 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if youare driving under the best conditions, the oil lifesystem may not indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However, your engineoil and filter must be changed at least once ayear and at this time the system must be reset.Your dealer has GM-trained service peoplewho will perform this work using genuine GMparts and reset the system. It is also importantto check your oil regularly and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

316

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message being turned on, reset thesystem.

Always reset the engine oil life to 100% afterevery oil change. It will not reset itself. To resetthe Engine Oil Life System, do the following:

1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button onthe DIC for more than five seconds. The oillife will change to 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes back on when you start your vehicle, theEngine Oil Life System has not reset. Repeatthe procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

317

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is located in theengine compartment on the driver’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 308 for more information on location.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 410 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filterdo the following:

1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of the engineair cleaner/filter housing.

2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.

3. Pull out the filter.

4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabsthrough the hinges on the housing.

6. Push the cover tabs on top of the housing tolock the cover in place.

318

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not thereand the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with theair cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine, which will damageit. Always have the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check your automatic transaxlefluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listedin Additional Required Services on page 413,and be sure to use the transaxle fluid listedin Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 420.

319

How to Check AutomaticTransaxle FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damagethe transaxle. Too much can mean that some ofthe fluid could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if you checkthe transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should beat normal operating temperature, which is180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place theshift lever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

320

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

The transaxle fluiddipstick handle is theblack loop with thissymbol on it. It is locatednear the rear of theengine compartment.

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 308 for more information on location.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three secondsand then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be in thecross-hatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way.

V6 Engines 5.3L V8 Engine

321

How to Add FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 420.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into thecross-hatched area on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 420.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way.

322

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating or if you needto add coolant to the radiator, see EngineOverheating on page 326.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

323

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If coolant needs to be added more than four timesa year, have your dealer check the coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use onlythe proper mixture of the engine coolantlisted in this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 420 for more information.

324

Checking CoolantThe coolant recoverytank cap has thissymbol on it.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 308for more information on the location of thecoolant recovery tank.

The vehicle must be on a level surface whenchecking the coolant level.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at the cold fill line or a little higher. Thecold fill line is marked with the same symbol asthe coolant recovery tank cap.

Adding CoolantIf more coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty,add coolant to the cooling system through thecoolant fill neck on the engine. See EngineOverheating on page 326.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost neverhave to add coolant at the radiator.Never turn the radiator pressurecap — even a little — when the engineand radiator are hot.

325

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to add coolant tothe radiator, see Cooling System on page 329.

Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 308for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingThere is a coolant temperature gage and awarning light on the instrument panel that indicatean overheated engine condition. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 182and Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lighton page 181.

In addition, you will find an ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and an ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE messagedisplayed on the vehicle’s Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 197 for more information.

326

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just openthe hood. Stay away from the engine ifyou see or hear steam coming from it.Turn it off and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in itcan catch fire. You or others could bebadly burned. Stop your engine if itoverheats, and get out of the vehicleuntil the engine is cool.



See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 329 forinformation on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 329 for information on drivingto a safe place in an emergency.

327

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineAn overheat warning can indicate a seriousproblem.

If you get an engine overheat warning but seeor hear no steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the engine can get alittle too hot when you:• Climb along hill on a hot day.• Stop after high-speed driving.• Idle for long periods in traffic.• Tow a trailer.

If an overheat warning occurs without any sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to doso, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Set the heater at the highest setting and thefan at the highest speed and open thewindows as necessary.

If the overheat warning no longer exists, thevehicle can be driven. Just to be safe, drive slowerfor about 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, the vehicle can be driven normally.

If the warning continues, and you have not stopped,pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the enginefor three minutes while parked. If the warningis still there, turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

328

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode allows yourvehicle to be driven to a safe place in anemergency situation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheat protection modewhich alternates firing groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In this mode, youwill notice a significant loss in power and engineperformance. The coolant temperature gagewill indicate an overheat condition exists. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer inthe overheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil life system.See Engine Oil on page 312.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Pressure CapC. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

3.5L V6 Engine shown, 3.9L Engine similar

329

A. Pressure CapB. Electric Engine Cooling FansC. Coolant Recovery Tank

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

If your vehicle has one of the V6 engines, thecoolant recovery tank is located in the rear of theengine compartment on the passenger’s sideof the vehicle. If your vehicle has the 5.3LV8 engine, the coolant recovery tank is located inthe rear of the engine compartment on thedriver’s side of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 308.

5.3L V8 Engine

330

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at or above the cold fill line on the coolantrecovery tank. To check the coolant level, lookfor the cold fill line on the side of the coolantrecovery tank that faces the engine. If the level isnot correct, there may be a leak at the pressurecap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in thecooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do not touchthem. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fans arerunning. If the engine is overheating, the fansshould be running. If the fans are not running, yourvehicle needs service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 329 for informationon driving to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

331

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery Tank

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

If you have not found a problem yet, but thecoolant level is not at the cold fill line, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolantrecovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 323for more information.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolantand the proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant level in the coolant recoverytank is at the cold fill line, start the vehicle.

332

If the overheat warning continues, there is onemore thing you can try. You can add the propercoolant mixture directly to the cooling systemthrough the coolant fill neck on the engine, but besure the system is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and radiator pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolingSystem

Notice: Your engine has a specific coolingsystem drain and fill procedure. Failureto follow this procedure could cause yourengine to overheat and be severely damaged.If your engine’s cooling system needs tobe drained and re-filled, please see your dealer.

1. You can remove thepressure cap whenthe cooling system,including thepressure cap andupper radiator hoseis no longer hot.Turn the pressurecap slowlycounterclockwise.

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans that there is still some pressure left.

333

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap andremove it.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if the engineparts are hot enough. Do not spill coolanton a hot engine.

3. Fill the cooling system with the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture, up to the baseof the filler neck. See Engine Coolant onpage 323 for more information about theproper coolant mixture.

4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from theengine and the compartment.

5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the coldfill line.

6. Install the coolant recovery tank cap and thepressure cap. After a day or two of driving,when the engine is cold, check the coolantlevel in the recovery tank. If it is low, refill itto the cold fill line.

If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantlylow, you should have a dealership servicedepartment inspect the vehicle for leaks.

334

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluidreservoir is locatedtoward the rear of theengine compartment onthe passenger’s sideof the vehicle. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 308for reservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leakin the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be somewhere within thecross-hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid isat the ADD mark, you should add fluid.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 420.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

335

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer FluidA WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagewill be displayed on the Driver Information Center(DIC) when you need to add windshield washerfluid to your vehicle. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 197 for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 308for more information on location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

336

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 308 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well,or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then youwill have too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work is done onthe brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid,it can spill on the engine. The fluid willburn if the engine is hot enough. You orothers could be burned, and your vehiclecould be damaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 179.

337

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 420.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 394.

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

338

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality GM brake parts. When you replaceparts of your braking system — for example, whenyour brake linings wear down and you need newones put in — be sure you get new approvedGM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakesmay no longer work properly. For example, ifsomeone puts in brake linings that are wrong foryour vehicle, the balance between your front andrear brakes can change — for the worse. Thebraking performance you have come to expectcan change in many other ways if someone putsin the wrong replacement brake parts.

339

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 308 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 341 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

340

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is nota 12-volt system with a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicleswith 12-volt systems with negative grounds tojump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

341

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlets. Turn off the radio and all lampsthat are not needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.Find the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on each vehicle.You will not need to access your battery forjump starting. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) jump starting terminal forthat purpose. The remote positive (+) terminalis located in the engine compartment onthe passenger’s side of the vehicle, on theunderhood fuse block. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 308 formore information on location.

To uncover the remotepositive (+) terminal,remove the fuseblock cover. You shouldalways use theremote positive (+)terminal instead of thepositive (+) terminalon the battery.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

342

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle.But if a battery has filler caps, be surethe right amount of fluid is there. If it islow, add water to take care of that first.If you do not, explosive gas could bepresent.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or onyour skin, flush the place with waterand get medical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−),or you will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

343

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal location of the vehiclewith the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal location of thevehicle with the good battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal location of thevehicle with the good battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes toa heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

344

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminaland Remote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the fuse block cover to its originalposition.

Jumper Cable Removal

345

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factoryand should need no further adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the headlamp aim may be affected.Aim adjustment to the low-beam headlampsmay be necessary if it is difficult to see thelane markers (for horizontal aim), or if oncomingdrivers flash their high-beam headlamps atyou (for vertical aim).

If you believe your headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommend that you take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 351.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

346

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps

A. SidemarkerB. Low-Beam

Headlamp

C. High-Beam HeadlampD. Parking/Turn

Signal Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 307 for more information.

2. Remove the screw from the headlampassembly.

347

3. Remove the headlamp plastic retainer bypulling it up.

4. Pull the headlamp assembly away from thevehicle and remove the electrical connector.

5. Remove the round dust caps to gain accessto the bulbs.

6. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise andremove it from the retaining ring by pullingit away from the headlamp.

7. Remove the electrical connector from the bulbby raising the lock tab and pulling theconnector away from the bulb’s base.

8. Install the electrical connector to the bulb.

9. Install the new bulb by inserting the smallesttab on the bulb base into the matching notchin the retaining ring. Turn the bulb aquarter-turn clockwise until it stops.

10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall theheadlamp assembly.

When you reinstall the headlamp assembly,make sure to line up the pin in the headlampassembly with the slot in the vehicle.

348

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps

A. Rear Sidemarker LampB. Back-up LampC. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 103

for more information.2. Remove the convenience net, if your vehicle

has one. Unhook the net from the upperwing nut.

3. Remove the two upper (convenience net)wing nuts.

4. Pull the carpet away from the rear of thevehicle.

349

5. Remove the two hex nuts.

6. Pull out the taillamp assembly and disconnectthe wiring harness.

7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it.

8. Install a new bulb.

9. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall it.

10. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall thetaillamp assembly.When reinstalling the taillamp assembly,make sure that you line up the four postson the assembly with the slots in thevehicle.

350

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Turn the lamp assembly counterclockwise andpull the lamp assembly out of the connector.

2. Pull the old bulb from the lamp assembly,keeping the bulb straight as you pull it out.

3. Install the new bulb.

4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thelicense plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-Up 921

Front Parking/Turn Signal 3157NAK

License Plate Lamp 194

Headlamps

High-Beam H9

Low-Beam H11

Sidemarker 194

Stoplamp, Taillamp, andTurn Signal 3057

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

351

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 410 for more information on wiper bladeinspection.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. Here’s how toremove the wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector awayfrom the windshield.

2. While holding the wiper arm, pull the clip upfrom the blade connecting point, and pull theblade assembly down toward the windshieldto remove it from the wiper arm.

3. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper armand snap the clip down into place.

352

To remove and replace the wiper blade elementdo the following:

1. The wiper blade element has two notches atone end which are engaged by the bottomclaw set of the wiper blade. At the notchedend of the wiper blade, pull the wiperblade element from the wiper blade assembly.

2. To replace the element, start at the heel endof the wiper blade, which is the end nearestto the base of the wiper arm, and slidethe wiper blade element, notched end last,into the wiper blade claw sets.

3. To engage the last claw into the notchedend of the wiper blade element, squeezethe wiper blade element at the notched area,and push the wiper blade element so theclaw fits into the notch.

4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notchesare engaged by the last claw set, and that allthe other claws are properly engaged in theslots of the wiper blade element on both sides.

A. Correct InstallationB. Incorrect Installation

For the proper type and size windshield wiperblades, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 421.

353

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 279.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 362.

• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, orif your vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

354

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact sparetire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

355

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 372.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency usewhen a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.

Compact Spare Tire Example

356

If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 389 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 377.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tireor compact spare tire should be inflated to60 psi (420 kPa). For more information on tirepressure and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 362.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

357

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineeredto standards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent ashigh as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

358

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission/transaxle, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 362.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

359

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 279.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating forthe front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 279.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating forthe rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 279.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number rangingfrom 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 279.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

360

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 362 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 279.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 369.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 372.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 279.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tireand Loading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 279.

361

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This labelshows your vehicle’s original equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressures for your tireswhen they are cold. The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on the label, is theminimum amount of air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximum load carryingcapacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tire and Loading Information label,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 279. How youload your vehicle affects vehicle handling andride comfort. Never load your vehicle with moreweight than it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 389.

362

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. If your vehicle has this feature, sensorsare mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly,except for the spare tire. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol on the instrument panel cluster,and at the same time a message to checkthe pressure in a specific tire will appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC) display. Thelow tire pressure warning symbol on the instrumentpanel cluster and the CHECK TIRE PRESSUREmessage will appear at each ignition cycle until thetires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can beviewed by the driver. For additional informationand details about the DIC operation and displayssee DIC Operation and Displays on page 189and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 197.

363

The low tire pressure warning light may come onin cool weather when the vehicle is first started,and then turn off as you start to drive. This may bean early indicator that the air pressure in thetire(s) are getting low and need to be inflated tothe proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tiresof a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tires issignificantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

364

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached toyour vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are cold.

See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279, for anexample of the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location on your vehicle. Also seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 362.

Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you abouta low tire pressure condition but it does notreplace normal tire maintenance. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 368 and Tireson page 354.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehiclehas Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealantcan damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.

The TPMS will not function properly if one or moreof the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable.If the system detects a missing or inoperablesensor, an error message SERVICE TIREMONITOR SYSTEM will be shown on the DICdisplay. If you have replaced a tire/wheel assemblywithout transferring the TPMS sensors, the errormessage will be displayed. Once you re-install theTPMS sensors, the error message should gooff. See your GM dealer for service if all TPMSsensors are installed and the error messagecomes on and stays on.

365

TPMS Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires, theidentification codes will need to be matched tothe new tire/wheel position. The sensors arematched, to the tire/wheel positions, in thefollowing order: driver’s side front tire, passenger’sside front tire, passenger’s side rear tire, anddriver’s side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your GM dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’spressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You will have two minutes to match each tireand wheel position. If it takes longer thantwo minutes to match any tire and wheel position,the matching process stops and you will needto start over.

The TPMS matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with theengine off.

3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle informationbutton until the LEARN TIRE POSITIONSmessage displays.

4. Press the set/reset button to allow the systemto learn the tire positions. The horn will soundtwice to indicate the receiver is ready, andthe TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE messagewill display. The TPMS system is ready forthe sensor matching process to begin.

5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.

6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valvestem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire’s air pressure forfive seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds.

366

The horn chirp, which may take up to30 seconds to sound, confirms that the sensoridentification code has been matched to thetire/wheel position. To decrease the tire’sair-pressure use the pointed end of the valvecap, a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.

7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for thedriver’s side rear tire, the tire learning processends. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:



The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:




367

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 369and Wheel Replacement on page 374 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 410 for scheduled rotationintervals.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 362 and Loading Your Vehicleon page 279.

368

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See“TPMS Sensor Identification Codes” underTire Pressure Monitor System on page 363.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 405.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 378.

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

369

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 355 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle.See Compact Spare Tire on page 389.

370

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires withthose that do not have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the same size, load range,speed rating, and construction type (radialand bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’soriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressurewarning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tiresmay give a low-pressure warning that is higher orlower than the proper warning level you wouldget with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 363.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label and its location on your vehicle.

371

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 370 andAccessories and Modifications on page 297 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

372

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conform tofederal safety requirements and additional GeneralMotors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

373

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them onlywith new GM original equipment parts. Thisway, you will be sure to have the right wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

374

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 378 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

375

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P225/55R17 orP235/50R18 size tires, do not use tirechains, there is not enough clearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension, orother vehicle parts. The area damaged bythe tire chains could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle and you or othersmay be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommendsit for use on your vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions.Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.



To help avoid damage to your vehicle,drive slowly, readjust, or remove thedevice if it is contacting your vehicle,and do not spin your wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the front tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size otherthan P225/55R17 or P235/50R18 size tires, usetire chains only where legal and only whenyou must. Use only SAE Class S-type chainsthat are the proper size for your tires. Installthem on the front tires and tighten themas tightly as possible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and follow the chainmanufacturer’s instructions. If you can hearthe chains contacting your vehicle, stopand retighten them. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Driving too fastor spinning the wheels with chains on willdamage your vehicle.

376

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop wellout of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Get the vehicle under control by steering theway you want the vehicle to go. It may be verybumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how touse the jacking equipment to change a flattire safely.

377

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 150 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).3. Turn off the engine and do not restart

while the vehicle is raised.4. Do not allow passengers to remain

in the vehicle.To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at the



front and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

378

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is located in the trunk.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 103 formore information.

2. Remove the convenience net if the vehiclehas one.

3. Lift the handle on the spare tire cover. Thehandle may hook on the front edge of thetrunk’s weatherstrip to hold the cover out ofthe way.

4. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise andremove it.

5. Remove the compact spare tire.

379

6. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwiseand remove it. Then remove the jack andwrench.

The tools you will need to change a tire includethe jack (A), extension and protection guide (B),and wheel wrench (C).

380

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireYour vehicle may have aluminum wheels withexposed wheel nuts. Use the wheel wrench toloosen all the wheel nuts. Do not remove them yet.

Or, your vehicle may have steel wheel covers.

To remove the steel wheel covers and wheel nutcaps, loosen the plastic nut caps with thewheel wrench in a counterclockwise direction.

If needed, you can finish loosening them with yourfingers. The plastic nut caps will not come off.

Use the flat end of the wheel wrench and pryalong the edge of the cover until it comes off. Theedge of the wheel cover could be sharp, so donot try to remove it with your bare hands. Do notdrop the cover or lay it face down, as it couldbecome scratched or damaged.

Once you have removed the wheel cover, use thefollowing procedure to remove the flat tire andinstall the spare tire.

1. Turn the wheelwrench once oneach wheel nutto loosen them.Do not removethem yet.

381

2. For all wheel types, find the jacking locationusing the diagram above and the correspondinghoisting notches located on the bottom sideof the plastic molding. The notches in the plasticmolding are marked with a triangle shape tohelp you find them.The front location is about 7.0 inches (17.7 cm)from the rear edge of the front wheel well.The rear location is about 4.5 inches (11.4 cm)from the rear edge of the wheel well.

3. Put the compact spare tire near you.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

382

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire. 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle

clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground to install the compact spare tire.

5. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

383

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth ora paper towel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper or wire brush later, ifneeded, to get all the rust or dirt off.

6. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces andspare wheel.

7. Install the compact spare tire.

384

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

8. Reinstall the wheelnuts with therounded end ofthe nuts towardthe wheel.Tighten each nutby hand untilthe wheel is heldagainst the hub.

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

385

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure touse the correct wheel nuts. If you haveto replace them, be sure to get newGM original equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 405for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 405 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

10. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

Do not try to put the wheel cover on your compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover inthe trunk until you have the flat tire repairedor replaced.

386

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

After the compact spare tire has been installed onthe vehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk.

When storing a full-size tire, use the extensionwith the protector, located in the foam holder,to help avoid wheel surface damage.

To store a full-size tire, do the following:

1. Install the tools in their original location inthe trunk area and secure.

2. Place the tire valve stem facing down andthe protector/guide placed through a wheelbolt hole.

3. Remove the protector and attach the retainersecurely

4. Store the cover as far forward as possible.

When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk,put the protector back in the foam holder.

387

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tireon page 389. Use the following as a guidefor storing the compact spare tire and tools.

A. CoverB. Wing NutC. Compact Spare TireD. Wing NutE. JackF. Wheel WrenchG. Extension ProtectorH. Foam HolderI. Bolt Screw

388

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen your vehicle was new, it can lose airafter a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and makesure your spare tire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to perform well at speedsup to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your tripand have your full-size tire repaired or replacedwhere you want. You must calibrate the tireinflation monitor system after installing or removingthe compact spare. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 363 for more information.The system may not work correctly when thecompact spare is installed on the vehicle.Of course, it is best to replace your spare with afull-size tire as soon as you can. Your sparewill last longer and be in good shape in case youneed it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix your compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

389

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.

Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, applycleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the integrated radio antenna and therear window defogger. When cleaning theglass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth andglass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label. While cleaningyour vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

390

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

391

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil andgently rub toward the center. Continuecleaning, using a clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never usesteam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters orspot removers on leather. Many commercialleather cleaners and coatings that are sold topreserve and protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance and feel of your leatherand are not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

392

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

393

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays ofthe sun. Use a car washing soap. Do notuse strong soaps or chemical detergents. Besure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 398.Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleumbased, or that contain acid or abrasives. Allcleaning agents should be flushed promptlyand not allowed to dry on the surface, or theycould stain. Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 394.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 398.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

394

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and madefor a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

395

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle throughan automatic car wash that has siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes, you coulddamage the aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Never drive a vehicle equippedwith aluminum or chrome-plated wheelsthrough an automatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

396

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be correctedin your dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these arenot removed, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they havecorrosion protection.At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutantscan fall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

397

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

398

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.It appears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You cansee it if you look through the windshield fromoutside your vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labelsand the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label in the trunk. It is very helpfulif you ever need to order parts. On this label,you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

399

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 84.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp circuit is protected by individualfuses in the underhood fuse block. An electricaloverload will cause the fuse to blow. If thishappens, have your headlamp system checkedright away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a fuse.If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., thewiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overloadis caused by some electrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsA circuit breaker in the instrument panel fuseblock protects the power windows and other poweraccessories. When the current load is too heavy,the circuit breaker opens and closes, protectingthe circuit until the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fusesand circuit breakers. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

400

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The fuse block is located on the passenger sideof the vehicle in the carpet molding. Removethe fuse block door to access the fuses.

Fuses UsagePWR/SEAT Power SeatsPWR/WNDW Power WindowRAP Retained Accessory PowerHTD/SEAT Heated SeatsAUX Auxiliary OutletsAMP AmplifierS/ROOF SunroofXM XM™ RadioCNSTR CanisterDR/LCK Door LocksPWR/MIR Power MirrorsAIRBAG AirbagsTRUNK TrunkTRUNK Trunk Relay

401

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 308 for more information on location.

Fuses Usage

LT PARK Driver’s Side Parking Lamp

RT PARK Passenger’s Side Parking Lamp

Fuses Usage

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

SPARE Spare

402

Fuses Usage

SPARE Spare

AIRBAG/DISPLAY Airbag, Display

TRANS Transaxle

ECM IGN Engine Control Module, Ignition

RT T/SIG Passenger’s Side Turn Signal

LT T/SIG Driver’s Side Turn Signal

DRL 1 Daytime Running Lamps 1

HORN Horn

SPARE Spare

PWRDROP/CRNK Power Drop, Crank

STRG WHL Steering Wheel

ECM/TCM Engine Control Module, TransaxleControl Module

RVC SEN Regulated Voltage Control Sensor

RADIO Audio System

FOG LAMPS Fog Lamps

SPARE Spare

BATT 4 Battery 4

Fuses Usage

ONSTAR OnStar®

STRTR Starter

ABS MTR1 Anti-lock Brake System Motor 1

BATT 3 Battery 3

WSW Windshield Wiper

HTD MIR Heated Mirror

SPARE Spare

BATT 1 Battery 1

ABS MTR2 Anti-lock Brake System Motor 2

AIR PUMP Air Pump

BATT 2 Battery 2

INT LIGHTS Interior Lamps

INT LTS/PNL DIM

Interior Lamps, InstrumentPanel Dimmer

A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor

AIR SOL AIR (Air Injection Reactor)Solenoid

AUX PWR Auxiliary Power

BCM Body Control Module

403

Fuses Usage

CHMSL/BCK-UP

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,Back-up Lamps

DISPLAY Display

ETC/ECM Electronic Throttle Control,Engine Control Module

INJ 1 Injector 1

EMISSIONS 1 Emissions 1

INJ 2 Injector 2

EMISSIONS 2 Emissions 2

RT SPOT Right Spot

LT SPOT Left Spot

HDLP MDL Headlamp Module

DRL 2 Daytime Running Lamps 2

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump

WPR Wiper

Fuses Usage

LT LO BEAM Driver’s Side Low-Beam

RT LO BEAM Passenger’s Side Low-Beam

LT HI BEAM Driver’s Side High-Beam

RT HI BEAM Passenger’s Side High-Beam

Relay Usage

STRTR Starter

REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor

FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3

FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump

PWR/TRN Powertrain

404

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 420 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for more information.

Automatic Transaxle 7.4 qt 7.0 L

When draining/replacing converter, more fluid may be needed.

Cooling System Including Reservoir

3.5L V6, 3.5L V6 Flexible Fuel, 3.9L V6 Engines 10.1 qt 9.6 L

5.3L V8 Engine 13.3 qt 12.6 L

Engine Oil with Filter

3.5L V6, 3.5L V6 Flexible Fuel and 3.9L V6 Engines 4.0 qt 3.8 L

5.3L V8 Engine 6.0 qt 5.7 L

405

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Fuel Tank

3.5L Engine (with NU6 emissions) sold new in CA, ME,VT, NY, MA (see your dealer for bordering states) 17.0 gal 64.4 L

3.5L Engine (without NU6 emissions) sold new in all otherstates (see your dealer for more information) 17.5 gal 66.2 L

3.9L and 5.3L Engines sold in all states 17.5 gal 66.2 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Nm

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

3.5L V6 N Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

3.5L Flexible Fuel V6 K Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

3.9L V6 with ActiveFuel Management™ R Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

5.3L V8 C Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

406

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 408Introduction ............................................... 408Maintenance Requirements ........................ 408Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 408Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 409Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 410Additional Required Services ..................... 413Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 414

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 416At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 416At Least Once a Month ............................. 417At Least Once a Year ............................... 417Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 420Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 421Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 422Maintenance Record .................................. 423

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

407

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be coveredby warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

408

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle in good condition, see yourGM Goodwrench® dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 299.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 410 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 413 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 414 for furtherinformation.

409

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehiclecan be dangerous. In trying to do somejobs, you can be seriously injured. Do yourown maintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper toolsand equipment for the job. If you have anydoubt, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer tohave a qualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should haveyour GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information,see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 447.

Owner Checks and Services on page 416 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehiclein good condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 420 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 421.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes on, it means that service is required for yourvehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).

410

It is possible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system may notindicate that vehicle service is necessary for over ayear. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench®

dealer has GM-trained service technicians whowill perform this work using genuine GM parts andreset the system.If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 316 for information on the Engine OilLife System and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears, certain services, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required services are described

in the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommendedthat your first service be Maintenance I, yoursecond service be Maintenance II, and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes onwithin 10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comeson 10 months or more since the last serviceor if the message has not come on at all forone year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 312. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 316. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •

411

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 318. See footnote (m). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 368 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 417.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. •

Replace passenger compartment air filter, if equipped. See footnote (g). •

Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

412

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for looseor damaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 318. • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission ControlService.

•

413

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (n).

•

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined thatthe failure to perform this maintenance item will notnullify the emission warranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however, urge that all recommendedmaintenance services be performed at the indicatedintervals and the maintenance be recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect other brakeparts, including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

414

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light andall belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate allhinges and latches, including those for thebody doors, hood, secondary latch, pivots, springanchor, release pawl, rear compartment, glovebox door, console door, and any folding seathardware. More frequent lubrication maybe required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 323 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) Check throttle system for interference orbinding and for damaged or missing parts. Replaceparts as needed. Replace any components thathave high effort or excessive wear. Do notlubricate accelerator or cruise control cables.

415

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. YourGM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you withthese checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 420.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 312 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.Failure to keep your engine oil at the properlevel can cause damage to your enginenot covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 323 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary.

416

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to the correct pressures.Do not forget to check the spare tire. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 362. Checkto make sure the spare tire is stored securely.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 378.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 368.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 120.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

417

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

Whenyou are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 120.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set,try to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

418

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mudand other debris can collect.

419

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtainedfrom your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meetsGM Standard GM6094M anddisplays the American PetroleumInstitute Certified for GasolineEngines starburst symbol.GM Goodwrench® oil meets allthe requirements for your vehicle.To determine the proper viscosityfor your vehicle’s engine, seeEngine Oil on page 312.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolanton page 323.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluidor equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

420

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourGM dealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number AC Delco PartNumber

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 10350737 A2962C

Engine Oil Filter

3.5L V6, 3.5L V6 Flexible Fuel and 3.9L V6 Engines 89017342 PF61

5.3L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 15284938 CF132

Spark Plugs

3.5L V6, 3.5LV6 Flexible Fuel and 3.9L V6 Engines 12591131 41-100

5.3L V8 Engine 12571164 41-985

Windshield Wiper Blades

Driver’s – 22 inches (55.0 cm) 19120353 —

Passenger’s-Driver’s – 22 inches (56.0 cm) 19120354 —

421

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.5L V6, 3.5L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines,and 3.9 V6 Engines

5.3L V8 Engine

422

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 408.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 416 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

423

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



424




425




426

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 428Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 428Online Owner Center ................................. 431Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 432Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 432GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 433Roadside Assistance Program ................... 434Courtesy Transportation ............................. 437Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 440Collision Damage Repair ........................... 441

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 446Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 446Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 446Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 446Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 447

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

427

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally,any concerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

428

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, you should file with the BBBAuto Line Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any other venue for reliefavailable to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

429

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limitedwants you to be aware of its participation in ano-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved by animpartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaint tothe final decision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and freeof charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

430

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

431

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available atits Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet bydialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

432

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost ofeligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

433

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872)

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security,the driver must present the vehicle registrationand personal ID before lock-out service isprovided. Lock-out service will be covered atno charge if you are unable to gain entryinto your vehicle. If your vehicle will not start,Roadside Assistance will arrange to haveyour vehicle towed to the nearest authorizeddealership. In the U.S., replacement keysmade at the customer’s expense will becovered within 10 miles (16 km).

434

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a sparetire, installation of the tire in good conditionwill be covered at no charge. The customer isresponsible for the repair or replacement ofthe tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.

We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

435

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receipt to RoadsideAssistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. U.S. customers callChevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.

436

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,the claims become excessive in frequency or typeof occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

437

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,you should contact your dealer and request anappointment. By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warrantyrepairs, and public transportation is used as‘shuttle service,’ the reimbursement is limited tothe associated shuttle allowance and mustbe supported by original receipts.

438

In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses maybe available. Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

439

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computer systemsthat monitor and control several aspects of thevehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-boardvehicle computers to monitor emission controlcomponents to optimize fuel economy, to monitorconditions for airbag deployment and, if thevehicle has the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), toprovide anti-lock braking and to help the drivercontrol the vehicle in difficult driving situations.Some information may be stored during regularoperations to facilitate repair of detectedmalfunctions; other information is stored onlyin a crash event by computer systems,such as those commonly called Event DataRecorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed,

safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbagperformance, and the severity of a collision.This information has been used to improve vehiclecrash performance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles anddriving safety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do notrecord sounds, such as conversation of vehicleoccupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

440

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and datacollection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, andsafety performance can be compromised insubsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

441

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

442

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 434 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

443

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

444

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts.

Remember if your vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurancecoverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

445

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify General Motors. Please call theChevrolet Customer Assistance Center at1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

446

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin fromHelm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

447

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner manualwill include the Maintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 US + Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 US + Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

448

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 297Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 165Additives, Fuel ............................................ 300Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 400Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 318Air Conditioning ........................................... 166Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 177Readiness Light ....................................... 176

Airbag Sensing andDiagnostic Module (SDM) ......................... 440

Airbag System ............................................... 69Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 85How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 77Passenger Sensing System ....................... 79Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 84What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 77What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 78When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 75Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 72

Antenna, Backglass ..................................... 244Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 253Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 180Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 396Care of Safety Belts ................................ 393Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 397Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 394Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 390Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 391Finish Care .............................................. 394Finish Damage ......................................... 397Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 393Leather .................................................... 392Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 397Tires ........................................................ 396Underbody Maintenance ........................... 397Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 398Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 394Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 395

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 166

449

Audio System(s) .......................................... 213Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 242Backglass Antenna ................................... 244Care of Your CD Player ........................... 244Care of Your CDs .................................... 244Radio with CD ................................ 217, 223Setting the Time .............................. 214, 215Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 241Understanding Radio Reception ............... 243XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 245

Automatic Door Lock ................................... 102Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 319Operation ................................................. 117

BBackglass Antenna ...................................... 244Battery ........................................................ 340

Electric Power Management ..................... 163Run-Down Protection ............................... 164

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 269Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 253Emergencies ............................................ 255Parking .................................................... 120System Warning Light .............................. 179

Brakes ........................................................ 337Braking ....................................................... 252Braking in Emergencies ............................... 255Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 111Bulb Replacement ....................................... 346

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 346Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 346Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 347License Plate Lamps ................................ 351Replacement Bulbs .................................. 351Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps ........... 349Buying New Tires ........................................ 370

450

CCalibration ................................................... 195California Fuel ............................................. 300California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 298Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 405Carbon Monoxide .............. 103, 124, 272, 286Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 393Your CD Player ........................................ 244Your CDs ................................................. 244

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 233Center Console Storage Area ...................... 143Center Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 36Center Seat .................................................. 16Chains, Tire ................................................. 376Charging System Light ................................ 179Check

Engine Light ............................................ 183Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 306Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 397Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 50Infants and Young Children ........................ 46Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 55

Child Restraints (cont.)Older Children ........................................... 43Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 62Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ..................... 64Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 65Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 54

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 166Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 396Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 394Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 391Finish Care .............................................. 394Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 390Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 393Leather .................................................... 392Tires ........................................................ 396Underbody Maintenance ........................... 397Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 394Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 395

Climate Control System ............................... 166Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 171Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 170

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 441

451

Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 39Compact Spare Tire .................................... 389Compass ..................................................... 195Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 107Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 252Convenience Net ......................................... 144Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 182Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 181Heater, Engine ......................................... 115

Cooling System ........................................... 329Courtesy Lamps .......................................... 161Cruise Control ............................................. 155Cruise Control Light .................................... 187Cupholder(s) ................................................ 143Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 437Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY) Users ................. 432Customer Assistance Offices .................... 432Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 428GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 433Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 446Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 446

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 446Roadside Assistance Program .................. 434Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 447

DDaytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System .................................... 160Delayed Entry Lighting ................................ 162Delayed Exit Lighting ................................... 163Delayed Headlamps .................................... 160DIC Compass .............................................. 195Disc, MP3 ................................................... 233Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 298Dome Lamp ................................................ 162Door

Automatic Door Lock ................................ 102Locks ....................................................... 100Power Door Locks ................................... 101Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 102Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 102

452

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 25

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 188DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 189DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 206DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 197

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 263City .......................................................... 267Defensive ................................................. 248Drunken ................................................... 249Freeway ................................................... 268Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 270In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 264Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 278Winter ...................................................... 272

EElectric Power Management ........................ 163Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 400Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 400Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 400Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 401

Electrical System (cont.)Power Windows and

Other Power Options ............................ 400Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 402Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 400

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 318Battery ..................................................... 340Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 183Coolant .................................................... 323Coolant Heater ......................................... 115Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 182Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 181Drive Belt Routing .................................... 422Engine Compartment Overview ................ 308Exhaust ................................................... 124Oil ........................................................... 312Oil Life System ........................................ 316Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 329Overheating ............................................. 326Starting .................................................... 114

Entry Lighting .............................................. 162Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 440Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 42Exterior Lamps ............................................ 158

453

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 318Finish Damage ............................................ 397Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 150Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 153Flat Tire ...................................................... 377Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 378Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 387Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ................................. 319Power Steering ........................................ 335Windshield Washer .................................. 336

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 187Fog Lamps .................................................. 161Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 16Fuel ............................................................ 299

Additives .................................................. 300California Fuel .......................................... 300E85 (85% Ethanol) ................................... 301Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 305Filling Your Tank ...................................... 303Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 302

Fuel (cont.)Gage ....................................................... 188Gasoline Octane ...................................... 299Gasoline Specifications ............................ 300

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 400Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 401Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 402Windshield Wiper ..................................... 400

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 182Fuel ......................................................... 188Speedometer ........................................... 174Tachometer .............................................. 174

Garage Door Opener ................................... 132Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 299Specifications ........................................... 300

Glove Box ................................................... 142GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 433

454

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 150Head Restraints ............................................ 15Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 346Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 400Headlamps

Bulb Replacement .................................... 346Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System ................................ 160Delayed ................................................... 160Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 153Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 346Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 347High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 153

Heated Seats ................................................ 11Heater ......................................................... 166Highbeam On Light ..................................... 187Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 270Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 270Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 306Release ................................................... 307

Horn ............................................................ 150How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 25

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 112Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 46Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 362Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 148Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 161Cluster ..................................................... 173

JJump Starting .............................................. 341

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 92Keys ............................................................. 91

455

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 355Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 164Courtesy .................................................. 161Dome ....................................................... 162Electric Power Management ..................... 163Exterior .................................................... 158Fog .......................................................... 161Reading ................................................... 163

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 55

License Plate Lamps ................................... 351Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 176Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 180Brake System Warning ............................. 179Charging System ..................................... 179Cruise Control .......................................... 187Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 181Fog Lamp ................................................ 187Highbeam On .......................................... 187Malfunction Indicator ................................ 183Oil Pressure ............................................. 186

Light (cont.)Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 177Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 175Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 175Security ................................................... 187TCS Warning Light .................................. 181Tire Pressure ........................................... 182Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ..... 181

LightingDelayed Entry .......................................... 162Delayed Exit ............................................ 163Entry ........................................................ 162Parade Dimming ...................................... 163

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 279Locks

Automatic Door Lock ................................ 102Door ........................................................ 100Lockout Protection ................................... 103Power Door ............................................. 101Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 102Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 102

Loss of Control ........................................... 262Lumbar

Manual Controls ......................................... 11

456

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 413At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 416At Least Once a Month ............................ 417At Least Once a Year .............................. 417Introduction .............................................. 408Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 414Maintenance Record ................................ 423Maintenance Requirements ...................... 408Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 421Owner Checks and Services .................... 416Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 420Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 410Using ....................................................... 409Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 408

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 183Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 11

Manual Passenger Seat .................................. 9Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 197Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearviewwith OnStar® ........................................ 126

Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 126Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 126Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 127Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 127

MP3 ............................................................ 233MyGMLink.com ............................................ 431

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 111Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 421

457

OOdometer .................................................... 174Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 260Oil

Engine ..................................................... 312Pressure Light .......................................... 186

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 316Older Children, Restraints ............................. 43Online Owner Center ................................... 431OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 128Other Warning Devices ................................ 150Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 170Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 165Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 127Power Mirrors .......................................... 127

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 329

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 416Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 397Parade Dimming .......................................... 163Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 121Shifting Out of ......................................... 123

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 120Over Things That Burn ............................ 123

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 177Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 171Passenger Sensing System ........................... 79Passing ....................................................... 260PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 108PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 109Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 165Door Locks .............................................. 101Electrical System ..................................... 400Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 113Seat .......................................................... 10Steering Fluid .......................................... 335Windows .................................................. 106

Pressure Cap .............................................. 326Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 42Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ......... 102

458

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 24

RRadios ........................................................ 213

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 244Care of Your CDs .................................... 244Radio with CD ................................ 217, 223Setting the Time .............................. 214, 215Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 241Understanding Reception ......................... 243

Reading Lamps ........................................... 163Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 102Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 39Rear Seat Armrest ...................................... 143Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 37Rear Storage Area ...................................... 143Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® ............................................ 126Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 126Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 126Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 12Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 420

Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 284Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 92Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 93Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 381Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 379Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 351Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 446General Motors ........................................ 446United States Government ....................... 446

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 86Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 87Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 113Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 35Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 434Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 278Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 422Running the Engine While Parked ............... 125

459

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 175Pretensioners ............................................. 42Reminder Light ........................................ 175

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 393Center Front Passenger Position ................ 36Driver Position ........................................... 25How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 25Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 24Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 39Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 37Right Front Passenger Position .................. 35Safety Belt Extender .................................. 42Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 35Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 20Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 34

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 410Seats

Center Seat ............................................... 16Head Restraints ......................................... 15Heated Seats ............................................. 11

Seats (cont.)Manual Lumbar .......................................... 11Manual Passenger ....................................... 9Power Seats .............................................. 10Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 12Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 16

Securing a Child RestraintCenter Front Seat Position ......................... 64Rear Seat Position ..................................... 62Right Front Seat Position ........................... 65

Security Light .............................................. 187Service ........................................................ 297

Accessories and Modifications .................. 297Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 299California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 298Doing Your Own Work ............................. 298Engine Soon Light ................................... 183Publications Ordering Information ............. 447

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 84Setting the Time ................................. 214, 215Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 397Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 121Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 123Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 152

460

Spare TireCompact .................................................. 389Installing .................................................. 381Removing ................................................ 379Storing ..................................................... 387

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 405Speedometer ............................................... 174Starting Your Engine ................................... 114Steering ...................................................... 257Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 242Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 150Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 143Convenience Net ..................................... 144Cupholder(s) ............................................ 143Glove Box ................................................ 142Rear Seat Armrest ................................... 143Rear Storage Area ................................... 143Sunglasses Storage Compartment ............ 143

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 278Sun Visors .................................................. 107Sunroof ....................................................... 144

TTachometer ................................................. 174Taillamps

Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps ............................. 349

TCS Warning Light ...................................... 181Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 241Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 107

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 107PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 108PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 109

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 150Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 182Tires ........................................................... 354

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 396Buying New Tires ..................................... 370Chains ..................................................... 376Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 378Cleaning .................................................. 396Compact Spare Tire ................................. 389Different Size ........................................... 372If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 377

461

Tires (cont.)Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 362Inspection and Rotation ............................ 368Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 381Pressure Monitor System ......................... 363Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 381Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 379Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 387Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 355Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 359Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 372Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 374Wheel Replacement ................................. 374When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 369

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 284Towing a Trailer ....................................... 286Your Vehicle ............................................. 284

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 256Control System Warning Light .................. 181

TransaxleFluid, Automatic ....................................... 319

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 117Trunk .......................................................... 103Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 152Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 151

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 243Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 372Universal Home Remote System ................. 132

Operation ........................................ 133, 139

462

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 252Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 279Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 206Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders .............................. 440Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 399Service Parts Identification Label .............. 399

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 170Visors .......................................................... 107

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 172Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 197Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 150Other Warning Devices ............................ 150Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 374Different Size ........................................... 372Replacement ............................................ 374

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 54Windows ..................................................... 105

Power ...................................................... 106

463

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 154Washer Fluid ........................................... 336Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 352Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 395Wiper Fuses ............................................ 400Wipers ..................................................... 153

Winter Driving ............................................. 272

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 240XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 245

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 408

464

2007 chevrolet impala owner manual m...a notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle....

Documents